Tektronix SC502 Instruction Manual



SC

502

OSCILLOSCOPE

Francais

Deutsch

El

*P

.









7

e

I

d

COMMITTEDTO

ronbc

EXCELLENCE

Tektronix,
P.O.

Box

500

Beaverton,

070-1878-01
Product

Group

Inc

.

Oregon

75

97077

PLEASE

THE

AT

CHECK

REAR

OF

OSCILLOSCOPE

Francais

INSTRUCTION

FOR

THIS

SC

Deutsch

Serial

CHANGE

MANUAL

502

Number

INFORMATION

.

S

*?A

MANUAL

First

Printing

Revised

APR

APR

1986

1975













CopyrightC1975,
Contents

form

of this

without

the

ProductsofTektronix,
byU.S.and

TEKTRONIX,
istered

Printed

are

reserved

Copyright

foreign

TEK,

trademarksofTektronix,

in

A

U.S

.

.

©1975,

Tektronix,

1980

publication

written

permissionofTektronix,

Inc.and

patents

SCOPE-MOBILE,

.

Specification

1980TEKTRONIXINC

Le contenu decemanuelnepout

me

quocesoit

Tous

les

les

logotypes

dsposbs

Imprim#
coracttristiquesetprix
logiques

produits

.

aux

.

sans

I'accorddeTektronix

TEKTRONIX

TEKTRONIX,

USA.TEKTROW

danslecadrededtveloppements

TEK

Inc.All

rights

may

its

and/or

and

not be

reproducedinany

subsidiaries

pending

and

Inc

.

price

change

reserved

are

covered

patents

are

privileges

Inc

.

.

reg-

.Tousdroitsrbwrvbs

titre

reproduit

sont

brevettsUSet

SCOPE

Inc

.

MOBILE,

sous

quelque

Etranger

QjX

Xserlserveledroitdemodifier

techno-

.

for-

sont

Copyright

halten.Der

von
Produkte

sind
Patente

TEKTRONIX,
Warenzeichen

Gedruckt
bleiben

.

et

©

TEKTRONIX,

13

*01=-CEPRo9

©1975,

Tektronix,

von

durch

abgedeckt

vorbehalten

1975,

1980

T7

F

1980

durch

Inhalt

Inc.nicht

Tektronix,

US-and

dieser

Auslandspatente

Tektronix,

Publikation

weitergegeben

Inc

seinen

.

and

.

TEK,

SCOPE-MOBILE

von

Tektronix,

Inc

.

inU.S .A.Spezifikations-

.

c1=7

:2F&

4MT

TEK,

;k

1f0)'It*49T*o

1t#'Ii7jUldb412

;

KT

SCOPE-MOBILE,

t7

F

l

-T,

Inc.Alle

dart

werden

Rechte

ohneGenehmigung

.

Tochtergesellschaften

and

=

gri

and/odor

`sind

and

:~

<

schwebende

geschiitzte

PreisAnderungen

74±

o

T

o

3f

vorbe-

instrument

Each

stamped

or
designates
of

the

serial
unique
United

manufacture

13000000
100000
200000
300000
700000

INSTRUMENT

on

the

each

to

States

is

SERIAL

hasaserial

the

chassis.The

country

number

instrument.Those

have

identifiedasfollows

Tektronix,
Tektronix
Tektronix

Sony/Tektronix,
Tektronix

The

Netherlands

number on a

of

manufacture.The

are

assigned

six

unique

Inc

.,
Guernsey,
United

Holland,

NUMBERS

first

sequentially
manufactured

digits.The

:

Beaverton,

Ltd.,Channel

Kingdom,

Japan

NV,Heerenveen,

panel

insert,

number

last five

country

Oregon,

Ltd.,London

or

letter

digits

and

in

USA

Islands

tag,

are
the

of









SC

502

LIST

OF

ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST
OPERATORS

SERVICE

Section1SPECIFICATION

Section

Chapitre

TABLES

OF

SAFEY

SAFETY

2

OPERATING

Introduction.. . .

Basic
Controls

General
Basic

2 INSTRUCTIONS

Introduction..
Fonctionnement..

Commandes

Fonctionnement
Application

. . . .

SUMMARY

SUMMARY

Operation

and

Operating

Oscilloscope

TABLE

. . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . .

INSTRUCTIONS

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

Connectors

Information

Applications

D'UTILISATION

. . . . ...

. .

et

connecteurs

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . ... . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . .

. . .

. . ... . . .

. . .

. . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

OF

Page

. . .ii
. . .
. . .

. . .v

. .

2-1

. . .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

. . . .

. . . .2-2

CONTENTS

ii

iii

1-1

2-1

2-1

2-2
2-5

2-9

2-1
2-1

2-5
2-9

THE

FOR
AVOID
ANY

TAINED
YOUARE

Section

Section4CALIBRATION

Section s

FOLLOWING

USE

BY

PERSONAL

SERVICING

IN

OPERATING

QUALIFIEDTO

3

THEORY

Performance
Adjustment

MAINTENANCE
CRT

Circuit

WARNING

SERVICEINSTRUCTIONS

QUALIFIED

OF

Replacement

Board

PERSONNEL

INJURY,

OTHER

INSTRUCTIONS

DO

OPERATION

PROCEDURE

Check

Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . .

Removal

THANTHAT

. . . . . . . . . .

NOT

DO

SO

.

. . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

ONLY.T

PERFORM

CON-

UNLESS

. . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . ..4-1

. . . . ...

. .

. . .

. . . .

. . . . .

ARE

.3-1

. .

O

Page

4-1

4-10

5-1
5-1

5-1

Kapitel2

-

;2JR

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
Einf0hrung

Grundbeschreibung
Bedienungselemente
Allgemeine
Grundanwendungsbeispiele

1U#&~RA

at)IL.

iJ:l~

I,n-iL,L

~i

87

. . . . . . . . . .

.

der

and

Bedienungsinformationen

.

.

.

. . . . . . . ...

'I

flZ

. . . . . . . . .

. . . ...

. .

.

t

.

... . . . . . ... .

. .

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...

. . . . . . ... ... ...

:3

4,49

. . . . . . . . . . . ...

.

. . . . . . ... . . . ...

. . . . . . ... .

. . . . . . ...

. . . . . . . . .

Bedienung

Anschliisse.2-2

. . . . . .

. . . . . ...

. . ... . . . . . .2-

. . . . . . ...

. . . . . . ...

. . . . . . ...

. . . . . . . . .

.

. . . . . . . . . ...

. . . . . . .....2-2

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . ... .

Seite

. .

.

. .

.

.
:

.

. . . .2-

. . . .

2-1
2-1

2-5
2-9

2-1
2-1

2-9

Section6OPTIONS

Section7REPLACEABLE

Section8DIAGRAMS

Section9REPLACEABLE

1

5

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELECTRICAL

AND

ILLUSTRATIONS

MECHANICAL

. .

PARTS

PARTS

. . .

. .

6-1

7-1

8-1

9-1

REVAPR

1982

SC

502

Fig

.

No

.

The

SC

502

Oscilloscope

2-1
2-2
2-3

2-4

2-5

2-6
2-7

2-8
2-9 High-resolution

Plug-in
Controls

Measuring
waveform

Measuring
respecttoa

Measuring
points

Measuring
Measuring

pulses
Measuring

measurement

installation/removal..

and

connectors

peak-to-peak

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

instantaneous

reference

time

on a waveform.. . . . . . .

risetime

time

. . . . . . .

phase

with

LIST

voltage

voltage..

duration

difference

. . . . .

phase

(period)

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

difference

difference

increased

OF

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . .

of a

. . . . . . . . .

do

voltage

between two

. . . . . .

sweep

with

. . . . . .

between

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . .

rate.2-14

ILLUSTRATIONS

Fig

.

Page

vi

2-1
2-3

2-9

2-10

2-11
2-11

2-12
2-13

No
3-1

3-2

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-4

5-5

.

Input

preamplifier

showing
Time

pointsinthe high-voltage
Replacingthecathode-ray

board
Cross

position
crt

Variable
Time

Location
pads

Input-Output
Rear

signal

relationshipofwaveformsatthree

removal
sectional

of front

. . . . . . .

jumper

Interface

. . .

Trigger

placement

of auxiliary

. . . . . .

current

.

view

crt

Hold Off-Variable

. .

Assignments

Connector

detailed

. .

. . . . .

support,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. ..... . . . . . . .

block

paths

regulator

tube,

. . . . . . .

showing

. . . . . . . .

Z-axis

For

. . . . . . . .

diagram

... . . . . . .

and

placement

crt

shield

input

solder

Plug-In

. . ..3-7

circuit

. . . .

and

.

. . .

Sweep

. . . .

.

. . . .

. . .

Page

3-1

5-2

5-3

5-3

5-4

5-5

Table

No

.

1-1
1-2 Horizontal Deflection

1-3
1-5

1-6
1-7

1-8

Vertical

Triggering
Calibrator

Power
Rear

Environmental

Deflection

System

. . . . . .

Supplies.. ...

Interface

System

. . . . . .....

. . . . . . . .

LIST

. . . . . . . .

System

. .

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . ...

. . . . . . . . . . . ..1-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. .

. .

O

Page

1-1
1-3

1-5
1-5
1-6

1-7

F

TABLES

Table

No

.

1-9
3-1

4-1
4-2

4-3
4-4

Mechanical
Channel
ListofTest

Vertical
Tolerance

Horizontal
Volts/Div

Switch

Deflection

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logic

Equipment

Accuracy

. .

. ...

. . . . . . . . . . . ...

Deflection

Attenuator

Check

. . . . .

Table

. . . .

. . . . .

Requirements

and

Accuracy.. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . .

. .
. .
. .

Page

1-7

3-2
4-1

4-2
4-6
4-12

REVAPR

1982

SC

502

OPERATORS

The

general

is

for

warnings
manual where
summary

Terms

CAUTION
could

WARNING

that

could

Terms

CAUTION
mediately accessibleasone
hazard

DANGER
accessibleasone

Symbols

safety

informationinthis

operating

both

and

.

In

This
statements

resultindamagetothe

statements

resultinpersonal

As

Marked

indicatesapersonal

property

to

indicatesapersonal

As

Marked

DANGER
Protective

ATTENTION

and
cautions
they

apply,

Manual

identify

on

including

reads

on

-

willbefound throughout

identify

Equipment

the

High

ground

-

Equipment

part of

the

servicing

but

conditionsorpractices

equipmentorother

injury or lossoflife

the

marking

refertomanual

personnel.Specific

may

not

appear

conditions

injury

hazard

the

reads

equipment

injury

voltage

(earth)

marking, or

hazard

.

.

terminal

or

itself

immediately

.

SAFETY

summary

the

in this

that

property

practices

.

im-

not

.

.

protective
conductorinthe

tion

Danger
Upon

accessible
trols

.

electric

Use
Use

a

product
Use

Refer
personnel

Use
To

voltage
list

SUMMARY

ground

.

Arising

loss of

conductive

that

may

shock

the

Proper

only

the

power

.

onlyapower

cord

and

.

the

Proper

avoid

fire

rating

for

your

product

connectionbywayofthe

power

cordisessential

From

LossofGround

the

protective-ground connection,

parts

(including

appeartobe

.

Power

cord

cord

connector

Fuse

hazard,

and

use

current

.

insulating)

Cord

and

connector

that

is in

good

changes

only

the

ratingasspecifiedinthe

grounding

for

safe

knobs

and

can

render

specified

condition

to qualified

fuseofcorrect

for

.

service

opera-

all

con-

an

your

type,
parts

Power

This
that
supply

and
grounding conductorinthe

safe

Grounding

This

torofthe

power
connectingtothe

Source

productisintended to

will

not

apply

more

conductorsorbetween

ground.A

operation

productisgrounded

protective

.

the

power

cord.To

cord

intoaproperly

Product

product

than

ground

through

avoid

operate

inputoroutput

fromapower

250

volts

rms between

either

supply

connectionbywayofthe

power

cordisessential

the

grounding

electrical

wired

shock,

receptacle

terminals.A

source

the

conductor

for

conduc-

the

plug

before

Refer

fuse

Do

Not

To

avoid

explosive
certified

Not

Do

To

avoid
without
the

coversorpanels

plug-in

replacementtoqualified

OperateInExplosive

explosion,donot

atmosphere

for

such

operation

OperateWithout

personal

viaaplug-in

injury,donot

operate

unlessithas

.

Covers

installed.Do

extender

service

Atmospheres

this

productinan

been

operate

not

apply

.

personnel

specifically

this

REVAPR

.

product

power

1982

to

SC

502

Do

Not

Do

not

product

aid

and

resuscitationispresent

Use

Care

Dangerous
To

avoid

tions

and

Service
perform

unless

another

When

voltages

personal

components

SERVICE

FOR

Refer

Alone
internal

Servicing

injury,

serviceoradjustment

person

existatseveral

do

while

QUALIFIED

alsotothe

capable

.

With

not
powerison

of

Power
pointsinthis

touch

exposed

SAFETY

SERVICE

preceding Operators

of this

rendering

On

.

first

product
connec-

.

SUMMARY

PERSONNEL

Safety

Disconnect

soldering,

Power

productisintended to

This
that

will
supply
and

ground.A
grounding
safe

operation

power

replacing

or

Source

not

apply

conductorsorbetween

protective

conductorinthe

.

Summary

before

components

more

ONLY

.

removing

operate

than

ground

power

protective panels,

.

fromapower

250

volts

rms

either

supply

connection

cordisessential for

source

between

bywayofthe

the

conductor

REV

APR

1982

iv

SC

502

CONSIGNES

Ce

rappel

des

consignes
utilisateursetau
mentsetpr6cautionsi3respecter
&

cheque
ge
te

Termes

Les
constancesouop6rations
de

Les
circonstances

ou

Repisres
CAUTION

risquedeblessure
risque dventuelded6t6rioration

DANGER

imm6diat

fois

qua

. IIestAnoter

rubriquederappel

utilisds

paragraphes

I'appareiloude

paragraphes

dangereuses

risque

blessure)

de

grav6s

(ATTENTION):ce

(DANGER):ce

pouvant

gdndralesdesdcuritd

personneldemaintenance.Les

l'utilisation

qua

ceux-ci

.

danscemanual

intitulds

tout

intitul6s

.

sur

I'appareil

non

entrainer blessuresoumort

du

peuvent ne pas

ATTENTION

pouvant

6quipement

autre

AVERTISSEMENT

pour

perceptibles

mot

s'adresse

avertisse-

sont

annot6s

chassis

d'alimentation

identifient

entrainerlad6tdrioration

.

I'utilisateur

mot

identifie

imm6diatement
1'appareil

de
indique

les

zones de

ce

dans

figurer

dans

les

indiquent

(dangerdemort

zones

les

ouun

.

risque

.

aux

manual

I'exi-

cet-

cir-

les

de

DE

SECURITE

MissAla

Une
relictbla
tation.Pour
cordon
pondante
pareil.Pour

xioni3la
danslecordon

Danger
masse

En

ments
commandes

choc

UtiliserIscordon
N'utiliser

d6s pour

parfait
changementdecordon

masse

fois installd

masse6I'aide

dviter

d'alimentation

avantdeconnecter

utiliser

masse,

provoqud

casdecoupuredela

conducteurs

apparaissant

6lectrique

qualecordon

votre

dtat.Saul,

de

1'appareil

danslechassis

d'un conducteurducordon

tout

choc

dans

I'appareil

rdalisdeaumoyen

d'alimentation,

parlacoupuredeconnexion

accessibles(ycompris

.

d'alimentation

appareil

personnel

un

d'alimentation,

dlectrique,

une

prisededistribution

I'entrdeoules

toute

an

d'un

indispensable

est

connexiondemasse,

isolants)

d'alimentation

Utiliseruncordon

.

et

prises

peuvent

qualifid
.

I'appareil

d'alimen-

insdrerlaprise

sortiesdeI'ap-

sdcuritd,

approprid

une

conne-

conducteur pr6vu

.

tous

les

boutons

provoquer

etlaprise

d'alimentation

peut

et

recomman-

proc6der

est

du

corres-

de

6I6-

un

an

h un

Symboles

grav6s

y

0

Source

L'appareiI
d'alimentation
teurs
tation

une

prdvu

d'alimentation

est

d'alimentation

etlaterre.Pour

connexionAla

denslecordon

I'6quipement

sur

-

Haute

DANGER

Borne

ATTENTION

conqu

maximalede250Vefficaces

masse,

massedeprotection

de

pour

fonctionner8partir

ou

entre

cheque

utiliser

rdalis6eaumoyen

d'alimentation,

tension

-sereporteraumanual

conducteur

I'appareilantoute

est

(terre)

d'une

source

les

entre

d'alimen­s6curitd,

conducteur

d'un

indispensable

conduc-

.

UtiliserIsfusible

dviter

tout

Pour

fusible

le
remplacement
od:mime
placement

qualifid

sonnel

pas

Ne
Pour

une

Ne

Pour
capotsoupanneaux
pro

utiliser

dviter

atmosphisre

pas

d6monter

dviter

longateur

risque

recommandd

doit

type,

mime

fusiblenedoit

de

.

I'appareilanatmosphisre

toute

explosion,

de gaz

toute

blessure,

.

approprid

d'accident
pour

toujours

tensionetmime

explosifs

les

capots

Ne

pas alimenterletiroirhtravers

.

(incendie

votre

appareil.Le

correspondreaufusible

etre

effectud

ne pas

utiliser

.

ne

pas

utiliserceproduit

. ..)n'utiliser

courant.Un

qua

cat

fusible

de

rempla-

rem-

par un

per-

explosive
appareil

sans

qua

dans

un

REVAPR

1982

SC

502

Ne

pas

d6panner

Ces

consignes

lifid.II

est

6galement
gneedes6curitd
r6glage

doit

s'effectuerenpr6sence

capable

Agir

tension

Des
pareil.Pour

d'assurer

avec

pr6caution

potentiels

dviter

tout

s'adressent

indispensabledese reporter

pr6c6dentes

lee

premiers

dangereux

blessure,

toute

CONSIGNES

UNIQUEMENT

AU

seul

exclusivement

lorsque

existent

PERSONNEL

Toute

d'une

secours

I'appareil

en

ne pas

h un

personnel

intervention

autre

casdedanger

an

est

diffdrents

pointsdeI'ap-

intervenir

consi-

aux

interne

personne

.

sous

sur

lee

qua-

ou

DE

SECURITE

DES

DE

connexions
sion
neaux,

Source
Cet

d'alimentation
lee

masse.Pour
Alamasse
cordon

TINEES

MAINTENANCE

.

Ddbrancher

soudureouremplacementdecomposants

d'alimentation

appareil

conducteurs

rdalisdeaumoyen

d'alimentation

et

les

composants

('alimentation

est

conqu

qui

n'applique

d'alimentationouentre

utiliser

I'appareilantoute

alors

pour

fonctionnerApartir

pas

d'un

est

indispensable

qua

I'appareil

avantleddmontage

plusde250Vefficaces

un conducteuretla

sdcuritd,

conducteur

.

est

.

d'une

une

pr6vu

des

connexion

dans

sous

pan-

source

ten-

entre

le

ADD

APR

1982

VI

SC

502

SICHERHEITSANGABEN

Die

allgemeinen
Angaben

der
nal.Spezielle

Handbuch
nicht

erscheinen

In

diesem

VORSICHTSHINWEISE
Zerstrirung

ren

k6nnen

WARNUNGSHINWEISE
PersonenschAden
lich

sind

.

Markierungen
CAUTION

ges BerOhren an

Personenschaden

Stelle
am

Gerdt

DANGER

BerOhrenaneiner
den

entstehen

Sicherheitsinformationen

dienen

Warnungen

finden,

zu

.

Handbuch

des

GerAtes

.

auf

-VORSICHTweist

selbst

.

-GEFAHR
kann

dem

Anwender-und

and

mOssen

BEGRIFFE

erlAutern

oder

erlAutern

f0hren

einer

k6nnen

dem

Gerat

darauf

nicht

entstehen

weist

darauf

zugAnglichen

.

in

Serviceperso-

Hinweise

jedochindiesen

anderer

Bedingungen,

unmittelbar

hin,

sind

Bedingungen,

GegenstAnde

oder

IebensgefAhr-

hin,

daBdurch

zugAnglichen

kann,

oder

daB

durch

Stelle

Personenscha-

diesem

Oberall

Angaben

die

fOh-

die

zu

zufAlli-

Schaden

zufdlliges

Tell

im

zur

FUR

dung

Ein-und
drahtete

Schutzleiter
oder

schen
raten

Gefahr

Durch
baren, leitenden
Bedienungselemente,

schen

Verwendung
Verwenden

einheit
finden

FOr
ziehen
Handbuches

Ein
schultem

DEN

von

elektrischen

AusgAnge

Steckdose

mehreren

SchlAgen

Leitungenzuverbunden

durch

eine

Schiag

Sie nur

geeignet

.

detaillierte

Sie

sich

Austausch

Personal

ANWENDER

ist

nicht

als
GerAten.Zur
sind

fehlende

fehlende

Teile

bei

der

eines

sind

Informationen

bitte

.

von Kabeln

vorzunehmen

Schidgen

der

einzustecken

einzige

die

GerAte

Schutzerde

(einschlieBlich

die

BerOhrung

richtigen

Netzkabel,

and

auf

vor

Netzsteckerineine

Verbindung

Vermeidung

untereinander

.

Schutzerde

isoliert

Netzkabels

die

die

sichingutem

Ober

Abbildungen

and

Steckern

.

der

Beschaltung

korrekt ver-

.

Verwenden

zwischen

von

mit

konnen

sind)

auslbsen

for

Kabel

alle

Kn6pfe und andere

einen

.

die

Versorgungs-

Zustand

and

Stecker

innerhalb

ist

nur

der

Sie

den

zwei

elektri-

sepa-

berOhr-

elektri-

be-

be-

des

von

ge-

SYMBOLE

-In

diesem

Markierungen

Netzspannungsvemorgung
Die

Betriebsspannung

Oberschreiten

aneine

halb
handen

MasseanschluB
Dieses GerAt

gungseinheit

Handbuch

Dieses

zu
finden

GEFAHR-Hochspannung

Schutzerdungskontakt

ACHTUNG
Handbuch

Versorgungsleitung

des

NetzanschluBkabels

sein,

der

Symbol

lassen

sind

auf

dem

and

istandie

mit

des

wird

Ober

mit

Erdpotential

GerAtemasse

zeigt

an,woVorsicht

ist,

oder

wo

.

Gerat

.

beziehen

-

.

fOr

dieses

GerAt

Versorgungsleitungen

Masse

and

muB

ein

verbunden

Gerates

den

Schutzleiter

verbunden.Zur

walten

Informationen

.

Sie

sich

dart

250Venicht

anzulegen.Inner-

Schutzleiter

der

auf

bzw

ist

.

Versor-

Vermei-

zu

das

vor-

Verwendung
Zur

Vermeidung

genzuverbunden,
aufgef0hrt

entsprechend

von Sicherungen

Ersatz

vorzunehmen

Arbeiten
Zur

Vermeidung

dieses
wenn

Entfemen
Zur

hAuseteilezuentfernen.Auch

.

se

GerAtesinexplosiver

das

Vermeidung

nichtinBetriebzunehmen

Arbeiten
Zur

Vermeidung

nicht

ohne

sollte

nicht

werden

.

einer

von

sind

and

sind

.

Sie

nichtinexplosiver

von

GerAt

nicht

Sie

keine

von

Sie

nicht

von

GehAuseinBetriebzunehmen.Der

Ober

einen

richtigen

BrandschAden

dieinden

dieinSpannungs-and

.

ist

Explosionen

dafOr

Gehauseabdeckungen

PersonenschAden

ohne

PersonenschAden

VerlAngerungsadapter

Sicherung

sind

Teilelisten

nur

vongeschultem

Umgebung

ist

die

Umgebung

geeignet

ist

.

Gehauseabdeckung

das

ist

GerAt

nur

Sicherun-

dieses

Inbetriebnahme

zu

.

sind

GerAtes

Stromwert

Personal

unterlassen,

keine

Ge-

ohne

GehAu-

ist

das

Ger9t

Einschub

betrieben

ADDAPR

1982

SC

502

Beziehen

Sie

Fiihren
Nehmen

arbeiten

im

um
suchezuleisten

Lassen
Sie

aneinem

arbeiten
An

verschiedenen

gefghrliche

keine

Sieandem

vor,

wenn

Bedarfsfall

Sie

besondere

unter

Spannungen.Zur

SICHERHEITSANGABEN

NUR

Sie

sick

auch

Servicetatigkeiten

Gerat keine

nicht

eine

andere

Erste

Hilfe

oder

.

Vorsicht walten,

Spannung

StellenimGerAt

Vermeidung

FUR

auf

die

vorangehenden

alleine

Service-

Wiederbelebungsver-

stehenden

liegen

Person

hohe

oder

verfi)gbar

wenn

von

Personen-

GESCHULTES

durch

Einstell-

ist,

GerAt

and

damit

FUR

DEN

PERSONAL

SERVICE

Sicherheitsangaben

schAden

ren,

Vor
setzen

entfernen

Netzspannungsversorgung

Die

iiberschreiten
aneine

halb
handen

sind

solche

wAhrend

dem

Betriebsspannung

des

Betriebsspannung

Entfernen

von

Bauteilen

.

and

istandie

Versorgungsleitung

NetzanschluBkabels

sein,

der

mit

Stellen

von

ist

immer

fur

GerAtemasse

fur

den

Anwender

and

Bauteile

anliegt

GehAuseteilen, LOten

die

dieses

Gertit

Versorgungsleitungen

and

Masse

muf3

nicht

.

Betriebsspannung

dart

250

anzulegen.Inner-

ein Schutzleiter
verbunden

.

zu

beriuh-

oder

Vets

ist

.

Er-

zu

nicht

bzw

vor-

.

ADD

APR

1982

viii



t~



f1fI



















502

SC

I

Ir

-q=a7x*omm

"01011*mggI

0)

zb

ti

tl0~Z6~

s

*

3

o

0»UrrT1- .

~fs.~~

*B_htzlzi~ t'1,Zo3mlf

CAUTIONIIhf*fsjtU*jEf-1tzI1J

;T

-

a

J

~'5ttb

NGERtt

DA

5tib>iba 3

,~b

,

kJ*ICM

.%3~i-%

t--litom#ic

"

Z

3

05j.5-T

LZ~~-~'

"

Yc

IC

L %

L

NT Ut--h4-H

o

`ftm

.

fecmixPeaITI'5

.9029IcM9Ae

IJ

-

.

nICItMtp-qk3

4AR

v3i4

~-K$P0»-70lIEI`MAhLZTt0

~

xm*f#Om*

%A~

LZFtOa

Itam-

lames-

16z

1

v

-

.

it

3tz-~b

1L,

CS

=7

-

i

2,

,

4

tPM71h

~'i7t~tLTC~td6~~.Xf*0)I%A

#

It

3t--bb,

-

sr

L

I`

l 5T

F
F

Icmfxb>tsLICLre*5bbTLtL1o

itNILA1A~3

h

7

b

,

95

h

~'

.

o

tODAet3ftL"

6~#x

c

T

~..0~>>tSt#~llSZ~~t~lfiZ<saA2~-

c0)

(Zia~t&E*

on

~-4I

Jts1'12,

y

Ittiff-"~UA

V!

IRA

*M

'7i

zt_b5IL

250VrmsJUNODV_ff4»aR'IZfFMU11

FPaI75

,

-F0)9-7,W-MftL'ZTtro

uq

:3

1tz-Itt010Hle~

-

.

.

VF

Vi~

M-ffii

=-FLT

cVM-F

t

late=-FLn*4

Ir-16

tzttaF

La-x

71J

;CDt:~b

t

r

a-Xo~zhm"r

=~Iclst

t}ts6~TTt6~o

L!s

IIfF

Jilt-,

-f7T-f

-

t}ts6N

C.T'tL".

~glcm-"b

o

.

L

-1

t

o

.

:tta-FtL1.

i0,)

O~XIi:

=s9~i

3

gait,

II*f*Iu&&q4rz-

.~6"Zt

>~f=iv=9

.Ir-1C$'ctt'L'Zo3f±IcA

-JI'

F"=i

-f

t

5

tsTTz

it

fe

,

~J~~±7

Icy 3

hlitUtzIV'M

Z~

IX

ADDAPR

1982





SC

502

AN

P~

MicIIAMEOD

Mih'rSt-b,

n53IbS

WE

*A

V/A*

t53'~~ct~

AILi14~i?MWSOZTt

#-

tx

"=i=

"F,-1'F-J-

h

/L'~O~fel

o

t,

"

o

ODiTV"

-

POD

S~Ci~3~p~Jy

.

. *

i

,

MON

'~

.F

A,CDITR

-

6

"o

iJ:ti.,~

h

rW-Dz'Tt,("o

"iYf-f,

AR

AODx

T75-V«

ADD

APR

1982

502

SC

The

502

Oscilloscope

SC

REVAPR

1982

SPECIFICATION

Section

1-SC

502

Performance

The

electrical

with

the

following

1.The

2

3

Deflection

Calibrated

Variable

instrument

ambient

The

instrument

.

ment

whose

Allow twenty minutes

.

specified
storageina

Characteristics

Factor

Range

Conditions

characteristicsinthis

conditions

temperature

limits

accuracy;sixty

high

Range

:

must have

between

mustbeinanon-condensing

are

described

warm-up

humidity

specification

been

+200C

under
time

minutes

after

(condensing)

1

mV/div

sequence
At

least2.5to1

are

valid

adjustedatan

and

+300C

environ-

Environmental

for

operation

exposure

environment

VERTICAL

Performance

to

.

20

V/divin14

.

to or

Table

DEFLECTION

istic

.

.

gether

to

plete

.

performanceofa

1-1

Requirements

stepsina

Any

conditions that

are

expressly

The

electrical

with

statement

SYSTEM

1-2-5

statedaspart of

and

their

related

of

calibrated

Continuously
steps
deflection

are

uniquetoa

environmental

validation

the

electrical

instrument

Supplemental

variable

and

extends
factor

particular

that

characteristic

performance

procedures areacom-

and

.

Information

between

maximum

to at

least

character-

.

limits

environmental

calibrated

uncalibrated

V/div

50

.

to-

DC

Balance

(+15°C

Accuracy

+15°C

0°C

Linearity

HF

Bandwidth

5

2

1

to

+35°C)

to

+35°C

mV/divto20

5

1

mV/div to2mV/div

+50°C

to

mV/divto20

Risetime
Typical

aberrations

mV/div At
mV/div At

V/div

V/div

(calculated)

step

response

0.5div+1mV.

±2%

±5%
Derated
0

as a
graticule

At

accuracy

div

.1

or

div

2

limits

least15MHz

least10MHz
least

5

less

signalispositioned

.

MHz

byan

additional1%.

of

compressionorexpansion

between

.

.

.

the

23ns

or less

t

2%,

3%

limitedto5

.

peak-to-peak

divisions

major

less.Signal

or

.

REV

FEB

1982

I

I





1





Specificatlon-SC

Characteristics

Response

AC

LF

Common
(CHI-CH2

Channel

Displayed
Typical

warm-up,

CHIorCH2

Mode

Display

Isolation

Noise

Trace

constant

mV/divto20

5
1

mV/divto2

Impedance
Maximum

Drift

Input

Input

502

Rejection

Mode)

(after1hour

line

voltage)

V/div

mV/div

Voltage

Ratio

Table

1-1 (cont)

Performance

less

or

withaccoupling

factor

settings

display

.

peak-to-peakat1mV.

.

10Hz
At

least30to1at1MHzorless

deflection

2%orless

15

MHz

0.2mVorless

1

M11

±1%

Requirements

.

related

with

crosstalk

to

same

Supplemental

1Hzor
Common

sions,10div
probes
probe

Input

I

less

Less

Less than0.3

Paralleled

350V(dc+peak
peakacat1kHz

recommended

250Vto10kHz

100

less

mode

CMRR

compensation

signal

than0.01%

than0.1

nominally

kHz

.

Information

with

X10

probe

.

signal

limitedto±

.

peak-to-peak

above

related

crosstalkistypically

.

div/hr.and0.03
mV/hr.and0.1

ac),

or less

peak-to-peakaclimit

derating

With

1

kHzislimited

matching

mV/°C

47pF

by

.

700Vpeak-to-

.

Above1kHz

to 25Vabove

5

X10

.

div/°C

divi-

by

.

.

is

Position
Delay

Line

Display

CHIorCH2
ALT

CHOP
CHI

Trigger

Range

Modes

minus

View

CH2

At

least±6

Selected

I

Alternates
other

Chops
Displays

and

Triggering

selected
button

divisions

inputisdisplayed

display

sweep

display

algebraic

CH2

.

waveformisdisplayed

Display

depressed

is

.

of

of

CHI

difference

Mode

.

.

CHI

and

when

.

and

CH2

CH2

.

between

instead

TRIG

every

CHI

VIEW

Nominally
leading

Chop

Triggering

of

waveformisnominallyatCRT
center

140ns.

edgeofthe

least

rate

at

pointonthe

.

Permits

triggering

250kHz

displayed

viewing

waveform

.

vertical

the

.

REV

FEB

1982

HORIZONTAL

1-2

Table

DEFLECTION

SYSTEM

Specification-SC

502

Characteristics

Sweep

Rates

Calibrated

Variable

Accuracy

+15°C

0
50

0.5ws/divto0.2ks/div

0°Cto+50°C
Linearity

Range

Range

to

+35°C

s/divto0.1s/div

.5

ms/divto1

s/div

Performance

0.5s/divto0.2ps/divin20
sequence.X10

fastest

At

least2.5

Derate

calibrated

Unmagnified

accuracy

to

±3%

±2%

±3%

Horizontal

1

rateto20

.

by an

Requirements

additional

stepsina

Magnifier

ns/div

.

Magnified

±4%
+3%
+4%

1%

1-2-5

extends

X10

.

Supplemental

Continuously
sweep
uncalibrated
The

variable

selectable

Rate or

Measured
sions
fied

sweep

Typically5%(0.1div)orless
timing
center8divisions

variable

rates

and

rate to at

control

between

Variable

over

excluding

beyond

over

any2div

Information

between

extends

Holdoff

center8displayed

the

.

slowest

least
internally

is

Variable

the

functions

first50ns
the

100th

internal

calibrated

1

.25

s/div

Sweep

.

and

magni-

division

change

within

.

divi-

.

in

the

Registration

MAG

Length

Sweep
Position

External Horizontal

Range

Fully

CW

Fully

CCW

Bandwidth

Deflection

Difference

Phase
Input

Impedance

Maximum

Factor

Input

Input

Voltage

divisions

0

.5

At

least10.0

Startof1

center

10th

leftofcenter

At

50

3° or

1

MS2

ms/div

graticule

division

feasts

2

mV/div±5%

lessto50

±2%

or less

divisions

sweep

line

of1ms/div
graticule

MHz

.

.

kHz

.

.

.

positionstoright

.

sweep

line

.

.

positions

of

to

Low
trigger
withaccoupling

Paralleled
350V(dc+peak

peak

frequency

coupling

at1kHzorless

response

selection,

.

nominally

determined

50Hzor

by47pF

ac),

350Vpeak-to-

.

by

less

.

REV

FEB

1982

Specification-SC

502

Table

TRIGGERING

1-3

SYSTEM

Characteristics

Trigger
(Minimum

Sensitivity

peak-to-peak

quired)

MHzorless

5

MHzto15

5

Coupling

DC

AC

AC

LF

REJ

Trigger Level
(Normal

modes
External

(Same

and

only)

Trigger Input

as

Impedance

Maximum

signal

MHz

Range

Single

Sweep

Ext.Horizontal

Input

Voltage

re-

input)

CHI

0

1

At

least±8.0

±1.2Vexternal

least

1

MS2

±2%

Performance

CH2

or

div

.4

div

.0

divisions,

.

Requirements

External

150

CH1orCH2,

.

60

mV
mV

and

at

Supplemental

Minimum
dc

.

Minimum

low50Hz

Minimum
low 5

kHz

Paralleled

V

(dc+peak

350

at1kHz

peak

requirements

signal

requirements

signal

.

requirements

signal

.

nominally

or less

Information

47pF

by

ac),

350

.

extend

increase

increase

.

V

peak-to-

to

be-

be-

Modes

Auto

Normal
Single

Holdoff

0

Time

s/divto1

.5

(Auto

Sweep

0.5ms/divto10
ps/divto0.2us/div

5

Variable

Holdoff

button

ms/div

gs/div

Range

out)

free-runsinthe

Sweep

triggering

Sweep
Upon

signal

will

triggering,
not run again
button

.

.

run unless

not

unless

sweep

absenceofa

triggered

runs

once

reset

by

.

and

pushing

will

Reset

TRIGGER
varies with
peak
quencies
minimum

Measured

Select

Nominally10ms
Nominally
Nominally<2,us
At

LEVEL

the

range

.

below

signal

at

Auto

100;ts

least20to

triggering

Not

recommended

30
requirements

rear

interface

mode

.

.

.

range.The

1
controlisinternally
the

Variable

functions

Sweep

.

range

automatically

signal

Hz.Below

and

free

selectable

or Variable

peak-to-

for

100

increase

20B-21B.

pins

run

sweep

Variable

between

Holdoff

fre-

Hz

.

.

REV

FEB

1982



Characteristics

CRT

Type

Graticule

Phosphor
Acceleration
Geometry

Potential

and

Orthogonality

(exclude4corners)

Intensity

Control

Function

Table

1-4

CATHODE

RAY

TUBE

Performance Requirements

Bowingortiltis0.1divisionorless
respecttograticule

lines

Table

.

1-5

CALIBRATOR

with

Supplemental

T3350

.

8X10

divisions

(0 .64

cm/division)

P31

.

12kV(-1.9kV

When

Intensity
clockwise
lected,
visible

.

the

and

sweep

Specification-SC

Information

with0.25

inch/division

.

cathode)

.

controlisrotated

Single

Sweep

baseline

modeisse-

spotisclearly

502

fully

Voltage
Frequency
Rise

and

Output

+20V

Impedance

-

Characteristics

Falltimes

Characteristics

0

.6

Twice

Performance

V

peak-to-peak,

the

power

Requirements Supplemental

±

I%

line

frequency

Table

POWER

Performance Requirements

.

.

1-6

SUPPLIES

than

Less
Approximately

Supplemental

20.0V ±0

-20V -20.0V ±0
+5V

-5V
+70

-70

Power

+33.5V

V
V

Module

Supply

Currents

+5

.07V±0

-5

.00V±0

+70V-3V,+4

-69V

+3V,

Typically

420mA.

1

As

.05V.

.05V.
.08

.20

.

120S2.

V

.

V

.

V

-4V

Information

Information

.

Fuse

REV

-33.5V
+11.5V

25

VAC

Data

F800
F970

FEB

1982

Typically
Typically

400mA.
400mA.

Typically10mA

0

.3A,

3AG,

slow blow

0

.75A,

3AG,

.

fast

blow

.

.

1-5

Specification-SC

502

Table

1-6

(cont)

Characteristics

Mainframe

Recommended
Interval

Warmup

Time

Characteristics

External

(Delayed)

Power

Adjustment

Line

Gate

Draw

Input

Performance

REARINTERFACE

Performance

Requirements

Table

1-7

Requirements

Supplemental

29

Typically
than1watt

POWER
1000

20

minutes,60minutes

or

storage

environment

watts
with

OFF

.

hoursor6

high

in

.

Supplemental

Pins

2313-2213.ECL

ating

between

nally

100S2.

Upon

sweep

SELECT

will

from

sweep

state
GATE

transition
will

truncate

Information

or less operating,

mode

switch

set

months

.

after

humidity

exposure

(condensing)

Information

balanced

+5Vand

input

ground

.

transitiontological

free-run

once

and

INPUTisgrounded.A

logical

high to

low

if itisrunning

to

oper-

Nomi-

reset

state

.

less

to

high

if

Gate

Select

Intensify

CH1

Trigger

Triggered

Holdoff

Ramp

Output

Output

Input

Input

Gate

Output

Output

Pin

2413.Ground(1kitorless)

external

signal

operation

Pin
ing
low
tion.Open
state

Pins

gate

as the

.

circuit

Open

.

1913.Single

between

state

+5

causes

ended

V

circuit

.

2713-2813.Analog

sweep

causes

ECL

and

ground.A
noticeable
defaults

output
resistanceofapproximately
tivity is

typically50mV/div

is

typically4MHz

Pins

2513-2613.ECL

ating

between

high

state

and

sweep

Pins

2013-21

ating

between

Pin

18A

.

Analog

ramp.Typically0V

sweep

V

.

+6

.4

Output

approximately1kit.Not
sweep

rates

.

+5Vand

indicates

can

not be

B

.

ECL

+5

output

resistance

faster

balanced

ground

holdoff condition

a

triggeredorgated

balanced

V

and

of

recommended

than1ps/div

selects

controlling

normal

input

operat-

intensifica-

to logical

with

1000.
bandwidth

and

output

A

.

output

ground

.

positive

to at

least

is

.

the

logical

high

source

Sensi-

oper-

logical

.

oper-

going

at

REVFEB

198

2

Table

1-8

ENVIRONMENTAL°

Specification-SC

502

Characteristics

Temperature

Operating
Non-operating

Humidity

Altitude

Operating
Non-operating

Vibration

Shock

Transportationc

With

power

module
RefertoTM
Without

500

power

.

power

module

module

.

30

major
Qualified

specifications

.

0°C

-55°C

95%
75%
45%

4.6km
15km(50,000
0

5Hzto

shocksineach

1A-B-1

+50°C

to

to

RH,
RH,to+40°C
RH,to+50°C

(15,000

.38mm(0

55

g's(1/2

axes, 18

under

and

+75°C

0°Cto+30°C

.015')

Hz,

sine)11ms

1A-B-2

.

.

.
.

ft)

.

ft)

.

peak-to-peak,

75

minutes

duration,
direction
total

shocks

National

.

.

.

along

.

Safe

Description

3

3

Transit

Meets

MIL-T-288008,

Exceeds

Exceeds

Exceeds
stalledinqualified

Meets
stalled

Association

MIL-T-288008,

MIL-T-288008,

MIL-T-288008,

MIL-T-288008,

in

qualified

Preshipment

class5.

class5,when

power

class5,when

power

Test

class5.

class5.

modules°

modules°

Procedures

in-

.

in-

.

Finish

Net

Weight

Nominal

REV

FEB

Characteristics

Dimensions

198

2

Table

MECHANICAL

Anodizedaluminum

2.5kg(5.56

in.long

12

.2

Ibs)

(30

.

.988

1-9

panel

cm)X5

and

chassis

.30inwide

Description

.

(13.46

cm)X5.0in.high

(12

.700

cm)

Section

2-SC

502

OPERATING

INTRODUCTION

The

SC

dual

trace
compartments
Recommended
P6105,
selectable1Xor

P6105is10X

Installation

The

SC

ReferringtoFig.2-1, install

502

SC
the

POWER

Oscilloscopeisageneral purpose,15MHz,

502

oscilloscope

of

a

TM

P6062B,

.

502

MODE

indicator

probes

is
controltoALTtoapply

for

and

P6060

10X

attenuation

calibrated

lightonthe

designed

500

use

.

and

the Oscilloscope

to

operate

Series

with

The

while

readytouseasreceived

Power

the

P6062B

the

power.Check

front

panel

SC

in

Module

502

are the

probe

has

attenuation

and

turn

comes

INSTRUCTIONS

two

of

the

that

on

.

a

.

.

Turn

in,
circuitry

A

brief

controls

the

Power

Module

otherwise,

damage

.

BASIC

descriptionofthe

and

connectorsisgivenonthe

off

before

may

occurtothe

OPERATION

functionofthe

inserting

following

the

plug-

plug-in

front

panel

pages

.

REVBAPR

198

Fig

.

.

Plug-in

2-1

0

installation/removal

.

Operating

Instructions-SC

502

The

vertical

behind
skirts

highlight the
selected.The
o'clock)
highlight

The

shaded
behind
sweep

rate

shaded

skirts

knob
not

force these

stops

.

Setup

TM
SC

the voltage

Information

1.Set the
500

Series

502

intoaPower

Power

Module

Power

Module

2.Set

theSC502

INTENSITY
FOCUS

MODE
POSITION

CH

1

CH

2

CH1VOLTS/DIV

Variable

CH1AC-GND-DC

VOLTS/DIV

CH

2

Variable

CH2AC-GND-DC

POSITION

SECONDS/DIV
CAUSWPMAG
SINGL

TRIGGERING

COUPL

SWP

SLOPE

LEVEL

SOURCE

lightly

the

VOLTS/DIV

darker

behind

sensitivity

the

colored

the

SECONDS/DIV

when

areas

and

are

502

SC

PowerModule

connectedtoa

is

and

frequency

Power

(Horizontal)

shaded

basic

gray

the

the

SWP

additional

for

operator

knobs

MODE

Module

switch

controls

NOTE

areasonthe

and

SECONDS/DIV
sensitivity
shaded

VOLTS/DIV

whena1OX

area

beyond

switchtoPWR

compartment.Make

requirement,

.

areas

(locatedat10

knob

MAG

is

activated.These

values printedonthe

convenience

their

switch

to

power

follows

as

Fully

ccw

As

is

1

CH

Midrange
Midrange

.2

Fully

cw

DC

.2

Fully

cw

DC
Midrange
5m

Fullycwand
Off (Button

Midrange

CH

1

AUTO

front

panel

knob

and

sweep

(locatedat2

knob

probeisused

indicates

off

source

then

:

skirts

o'clock)

only.Do

mechanical

Turn

OFF

.

and

install

sure the

that

turnonthe

pushed

out)

rate

the

meets

in

.

the
the

5.Adjust

trolssothat

left

the

6.Adjust

display

7.Disconnect

verticallysothatitcoincides

of

the

Calibration

8.Move

and

reconnect

connector

9.The
complete

six
frequency)

Trigger

10.Press the

triggering

horizontal

External

11.Connect
signaltopin
Z-axis

12.Slowly
clockwise
and

brightened

correspond
squarewaves

This

procedure

explained
tion

are

the

channel

the

display

edgeofthe

the

FOCUS

over

the

entire

the

graticule

input)onthe

completes

discussed

.

Check

the

trace1.5

the

.

display

View

waveform.The
graticule

Intensity

until

here,oroperations

shouldbe3

cycles

shown

TRIGGER

a5V,1

24A

(ifithas

rotate
the

segments.The

with the

.

for

the

horizontally

trace

the

under

is

graticule

control

trace

input

calibrator signal to

(five

centerlineisthe

Input

rear

the

appearstobe

description

502.Instrument

SC

and

horizontal

centered

.

forasharp,

length

signal
with the

divisions

divisionsinamplitude

complete

.

VIEW

startofthe

kHz

sine-waveorsquare-wave

been

connected

interface

INTENSITY

tops

of

which

General

POSITION

vertically

.

and

position

center

horizontal

below

graticule

the

cycles

for50Hz

button

and

waveform

triggering

as the

connector

control

a

seriesofdimmed

brightened

the

sinewaves

the basic operating

of

operations

further

need

Operating

con-

and

starts

at

well-defined

the

trace

line

center

CH1input

with

line

observe

.

Information

the

at

the

point

.

external

counter-

segments

not

explana-

or

.

Advance

3

.

the

desired

graticule

4.Connect

connectortothe

2-2

viewing

center

the

INTENSITY

level.The

.

a

1X

probe

CH1input

control

should appear

trace

or

test

connector

until

lead

CONTROLS

the

trace

is at

near the

the

from

.

CAL

FOCUS

tainingawell

INTENSITY
ness

.

AND

Control.Provides

defined

Control.Controls

CONNECTORS

display

adjustment

.

the

display

REVAAPR

for

ob-

bright-

1980





J[ti~7a~~~

SC

5172

OSCILLOSCOPE

8W?15MHi

Ta

sz3~s

OperatingInstructions-SC

5®2

VOLTSlDIV

CH

2

VOLTS/DIV

_

SECONDS/DIV

POSITION

1878-a2

REV

Fig.2-2.Controls

A

APR

1980

and

connectors

.

2-3



Operating

Instructions-SC502

TRIGGER
triggering

MODE
mode
and

PWR
off

CH1.
CH

ALT.Dual

VIEW

signaltobe

Switch.Selects

of

operation

off

.

OFF.The

.

Channel1is

2.Channel2is
trace

Pushbutton.Causes

and

internal

displayed
displayed

display

Displayisswitched

each

end

of

speeds
CHOP.Dual trace

sweep.Generally

above1ms/cm

displayofboth channels

Displayisswitched

>250

kHz.Generally

below1ms/cm
CH1MINUS

inverted

1

and

CH

CH2POSITION.Controls the

.

CH2.

algebraically

and

positionofthe displayed

VOLTS/DIV

tion

factor

control
deflection
the

lightly
Read
when

Switch.Selects the

ina1-2-5

(CAL)

mustbe

factor.Read

shaded

the

deflection

usinga10X

area

factor

probe

the

displayedonthe

the

vertical

the

turns

instrument

instrument

.
.

both

of

between

channelsatthe

used

.

between

used

The

the

channels

for

sweep

inputofchannel2is

addedtochannel1.

signals

.

vertical

sequence.The
fullycwfor
the

deflection

when

the

usinga1X

over

the

factor

.

sweep

crt

.

amplifier

on

power

channels

for

sweep

speeds

vertical

deflec-

variable

indicated

over

probe

grey area

is

at

Calibrator
square

calibrationofgain

POSITION
horizontallyonthe

EXT
horizontal
The
trolledbythe

.

CAL
control

rates
SECONDS/DIV
internal

.

holdoff
When

sweep

14

SECONDS/DIV
sweep
inputtothe

control
rates.The
indicates
colored
sweep

.

TRIG'D
the

triggered

Jack.Provides a

wave

at

twice

and

probecompensation

control.Positions

crt

.

TRIG/AMPL.External

amplifierorfor

external

amplifier

triggerACpushbutton

(Variable)/PULL

provides

between

X10

continuously

the

calibrated

switchorwhen

jumper,

time

the

CAL

rate/division

provides

.

knobispulled

is

increased by afactoroften

Switch.Selects

rateorthe

AMPL

horizontal

must be

areaat10

rate

READY

single

fullycwfor

light

shaded

the

unmagnified

area

o'clock

.

Indicator.The

sweepisarmedorthat

.

positive

the

line

input

external

ac-dc

SWP

a

mode

amplifier.The

under

shows

going

frequency

the

connector
trigger

couplingiscon-

.

MAG.The

variable

settingsofthe

selected

variable

out,

the displayed

horizontal

the

foranexternal

VARiable

calibrated

the

knob

sweep

light

rate.The

the

magnified

indicates

the

sweep

0

.6

for

.

display

for

signal

CAL

sweep

by an

trigger

sweep

skirt

that

V

.

.

is

2-

4

CAL

Variable

calibrated

calibrated

Input

vertical

settings of

Connector.Bnc

input

AC-GND-DC
amplifier
signals

amplifier,
signal.In
vertical
connector

ingofthe
position,

input

are capacitively

blocking the
the

amplifierisdisconnectedfrom

and

input

all

passedtothe

Control.Provides

deflection

factors

the

VOLTS/DIV

connector

signal

.

Switch.Selects

coupling.In

coupledtothe

do

component

GND

position,

grounded.This allows

coupling

components

input

capacitor.In

of

amplifier

the

.

variable

between

for

the

AC

the

inputofthe

the

input

un­the

.

switch

applying

vertical

position,

vertical

of

the

the

input

precharg-

DC

the

signal

are

POWER
SC

RESET
single

Trigger

Indicator.The

502

poweristurned

Pushbutton.Push

sweep

Mode

AUTO
and
no

AUTO
by

PushbuttonIn.

providesareference

adequate

Pushbutton

the

applied

adequate
SINGLE

pushbuttonisin

operation

Pushbuttons

triggering

trigger

triggering

Pushbutton

SWP

and

light

.

on

to

.

.

The

signal

Out.The

signal.When

signal,

the

AUTO

the

when

that

sweep

free

there

indicates

arm

Sweep

trace

.

sweepisinitiated

thereisno

thereisno

trace

In.When

pushbutton

@

MAY

the

in

runs

is

.

this

is

1980

Operating

Instructions-SC

502

out,

the

sweep

mode
sweeps

buttonispushed

trol

must be

the

COUPLing
of
circuit

AC
coupledtothe
circuit.DC

50
AC

trigger signal
trigger

LFREJ
coupled
rejected

attenuated

After

.

cannot

adjustment

made

out

position

Pushbuttons

the

trigger

.

PushbuttonIn.

kHz

are

Pushbutton

generator
PushbuttonIn.

tothe

operatesinthe

the

be

.
for

with

.

signaltothe

input

rejected

is

attenuated

Out.(DC)

are

input

signals

and

.

single

sweep

displayed

The

triggering

single

AUTO

the

Determinethecoupling

.

Signals

the

of

and

.

coupled

.

circuit

Signals
thetrigger

of

below

once,

runs

until

the

LEVEL

sweep

pushbutton

trigger

are

capacitively

trigger

signals

All

below

componentsofa

the

inputofthe

to

arecapacitively

circuit.DC

about5kHz

sweep

further
RESET

con-

operation

in

generator

generator

about

is

are

measurements.The
and

ten

horizontal

0

.25

inch.In
minor

five
timing are

be

made

Intensity

The

INTENSITY

the
so

the

probably
sweep

high-intensity
permanent

Display

If

a

FOCUS
of

the

should

addition,

divisions.The

calibratedsothat

from

the

Control

intensity of

control.This

displayiseasily

require

rates.Be

Focus

well-defined

control,

internal

onlybedone

careful

spot

damage

evenatlow

astigmatism

graticule

divisions.Each

graticule

the

readjustment

may
tothe

display

by

is

each

major

vertical

accurate

.

displayonthe

controlisnormally

visible

but not

onlyaspotisdisplayed.A

when
burn

the

crtifallowedtoremaintoo

cannot

intensity

control

qualified

marked

with

eight

divisionis0

division

gain

measurements

crt

overly

for

different

crt

phosphor

be obtained

settings,

mayberequired.This

personnel

.25

divided

is

and

horizontal

controlled

is

bright.It

displays

and

adjustment

.

vertical
inch

by

into

can

by

adjusted

will

or

cause

long

with

the

.

SOURCE

the

signal

circuit

.

CH
signaliscoupled

CH
signaliscoupledtothe

LINE.(Both
depressed

is

coupledtothe

EXT
EXT

triggering

SLOPE
of

the

LEVEL

trigger signalatwhich

the

GENERAL

Graticule

The

graticuleoftheSC502

faceplateofthe

Pushbuttons.Determine

coupledtothe

1

PushbuttonIn.Asample

the

to

2

PushbuttonIn.Asam

1

and

CH

.)Asampleofthe

triggering

connector

circuit

provide

to

In.Signals

.

the

trigger

to

the amplitude

the

INFORMATION

internally

is

accurate,

Pushbutton

TRIG

Switch.Selects

trigger signal

Control.Selects

OPERATING

crt

the source

inputofthe

of

triggering

ple of

triggering

CH2pushbuttons

power

circuit

connectedtothe

are

coupled

rising

or

the

sweep

markedonthe

trigger

the

Channel

circuit

Channel

the

circuit

signal

line

.

to

falling

slope

sweep

.

point

istriggered

parallax-free

.

.

of

the

on

1

2

.

To

check

turn

the

FOCUS

a

signal

displayed

correctly
trace

will

the

FOCUS

AlignmentAdjustment

Trace

Thisisan

be a

person

Intensity

Interface

Intensity

third

item

the

and
the

modulating
connector,
waveform

amplitude
on
turn

level,

normal
tion
levels

frequency

horizontal (X-Axis)

waveshape

the

setting of

the

on

and

brightness

can be

.

Maximum

for

proper

control

on

set,

the

vertical

come

into

control

internal

qualified to

Modulation

Connector

(Z-Axis)

electrical

of

of

signal,

changes

to

provide

required

the

displaytoa
about-5V

obtained

safe

rangeofthe

setting of

through

the

crt

screen.If

and

horizontal

sharpest
.

adjustment

modulation

the

applied

for

INTENSITY

level."Gray

focus

so

.

do

(Applies

has

been

phenomenatothe

coordinates

displayed

pin

to

the

intensityofthe

this

typeofdisplay

visible

trace

normal

by
input

brightness

will

turn

applying

voltageis+or-10

Z-Axis

circuit

the

Astig

control,

the

optimum

the

Astig

portionsofthe

at

the

same

shouldbedone

and

onlyifpin

connected)

canbeusedtorelate

vertical

without

signal.The

24Aofthe

.

modulation

control.About+5V

level

the

display

intensity

scale"

signals

between

isdoto2MHz

slowly

setting

control

position

24A

of

(Y-Axis)

affecting

Z-Axis

rear interface

displayed

The

voltage

depends

fromanoff
off

from

modula-

these

V.Usable

with

is

of

only

a

will

a

.

2-

@

MAY

1980

5

OperatingInstructions-SC

502

Calibrator

The

internal
venient
sweep
adjusting
instruction

600

signal

timing.The

probe

mV,

within1%.

manual.The

signalistwice

Vertical

Displays

Single-Trace

used

for

the

.

input

channel

either

single-trace

be
desired

display
can

select

source

Dual-Trace

position
alternates

of

betweenChannel1and
sweepofthe
sweep

rates,

display

at

sweep

calibratoroftheSC502

source

checking

for

calibrator

basic

vertical

signalisalso

compensation,asdescribedinthe

The

the

power-line

Displays.Either of

displays.Apply

connector

used

vertical

Operation

the

MODE

switch

output
frequencyofthe

.

square-wave

frequency

and

set

The

trigger

channel

(Alternate

produces

.

the

input

the

the

MODE

SOURCE

as a

Mode).The

Channel2with

crt.Although
the

CHOP

rates

the

ALT

mode

providesamore

belowabout50Wdiv

mode

can

providesacon-

gain

and

useful

for

probe

voltage

square-wave

channels

signal to

can

the

switch

switches

trigger

signal

ALT

display

a

that

each

beusedatall

satisfactory

.

to

is

one

channel

channel)

other

The

following

1.Do

SC

502

.

2.Do

about

eight

example,
voltage

four

volts.Larger

3.Use

most

nearly
midscreen
positions

dynamic

4.For
1

and

CH
position

offset

to

.

general

not

exceed

not

apply

signals

times

the

withaVOLTS/DIV

applied

to that

voltages

CH1and

CH2POSITION

position

viewed

when

the

MODE

of

range

forCH1

similar

response from each

CH2AC-GND-DC

.

thedocomponent

precautions

that

voltage

exceedan

the input

VOLTS/DIV

switch

channel

the

should

may

distort

signalofeach

in

either

switch.This

MINUS

CH

switches

ofasignal

on

shouldbeobserved

rating of

equivalent

switch

control

setting

not

exceed

the

display

setting

.

of0.5,

about

.

settings that

channel

the

CH1or

ensures

2

mode

channel,

to

CH

the

greatest

operation

set

the

same

the

:

the

of

For
the

to

2

.

the

CH

In

the

switches,astable
showing
related,

Dual-Trace

position
electronically

CHOP
slower
single-shot
sweep

may

and

Proper

1orCH2positionsofthe

displayoftwo

true

one

relationship.If

time

the

signals

of

Operation

the

of

mode

than

MODE

switched

provides

about

50

switch

between

the

ms/div,

phenomena

rates,

the

chopped

interfere

external

with

the

triggering

displayed

(Chopped

aretobe

switching

display

operationisobtainedbyusing
signal thatistime-related
the

same

resultastriggering

to

Channel2.

signals

Two

the

chopped

However,ifthe

displayed

Algebraic

the

MODE

signals,

two

undesired

that

are

mode,

signals

will

appear

Addition

switch

canbeusedtodisplay

for

common-mode

signal,orfor

time-related

showing

are

unstable

.

The

CH

offset

do

signals

the

produces

channels.In

best

display

whenever

or

.

for

the

external

either

internally

true

not

time-related,

.

1

MINUS

rejection

(applyingaDC

trigger

SOURCE

willbedisplayed,
signals
will

are

not

be unstable

Mode).The

display

a

general,

at

sweep

dual-trace,

displayed.At

becomes

chopped

apparent

mode

triggering

signal.This

from

provides

Channel1or

canbedisplayed

time

relationship

one

CH2position

difference

the

remove

to

voltageto

time

.

CHOP
that

the

rates

faster

from

signal

an

of
of

of

is

a

in

.

Deflection

The

is

determined

VOLTS/DIV
variable
dicatedbythe
VOLTS/DIV
position

The

ly

variable

between

switches
maximum

division

Reliable
both
nected
additiontothe

the

signal

lead

Factor

amount

switches,

controls.The

variable

(fully

VOLTS/DIV

(uncalibrated)

the

The

.

vertical

.

signal

the

oscilloscope

togetherbya

probe

can

be

connected

of

by the

VOLTS/DIV

clockwiseindetent)

calibrated
VOLTS/DIV

signal lead or

establishacommon

Coupling

Input

AC-GND-DC

The

method
and
use

the

.

for

theapplied

applied

vertical

signal

and

calibrated

controls

variable

deflection

measurements

and

common

provides the

ground

switches

signal

signal

determines

deflection

produced

amplitude;the

the

setting

deflection

switches apply

are settothe

.

controls

provide

vertical

settings

variable

factor

of

controls

to

cannot

unit

the

under

reference (ground)
probe.The
best

ground.Also,

to

the

post

with

the

allow a

.

The

typeofdisplay desired

the

settingofthe

the

VOLTS/DIV

of

only

continuous-

deflection

the

VOLTS/DIV

at

least50V

be

made

test

ground

chassis

signal

source

choice

coupling

by a

signal

factors

when

calibrated

factors

extend

unless

are con-

lead

strap

ground

a

ground

.

of

coupling

method

in-

the

the
per

in

on

to

to

2-6

MAY

1980

Operating

Instructions-SC502

In

theACcoupling

signalisblocked
low-frequency

10Hz.

Therefore,
expected
of

waveform

near

low-frequency

provides

the

thatismuch

The

DC

applications.This
component

below

about50Hztoavoid the

occur

using ac coupling

The

GND

without the

input
signal

appliedtothe

the

input

circuit

resistor.The

In

the

through

.

GND

potential

ground
network.This

to

chargetothe
appliedtothe
positionofthe

transients
amplifier

accidentally

input.The

by

-3dB
some

this

frequency

tilt

will

also

components.The

best

displayofsignals

larger

than

coupling

position

ofasignal

position

needtoexternally

and

connectedtoground

amplifier

position,

a1Mil

network

average

probe.Since

AC-GND-DC

measureofprotection

current

the
circuitry

procedure
connectedtoa

than

that

1.Before

set

the

2.Touch

Wait

several

discharge

3.Connect

4.Wait

capacitortocharge

levels

during

should

previously

connecting

AC-GND-DC

the

seconds

.

several

that
capacitor

signal

probe

the

probe

be

.

position,

a

capacitorinthe

pointinthe

the do

AC

low-frequency

limit.Attenuationin

appearinsquare

AC

withado

component

the

ac

position

and

can

allows

measurement

mustbeusedtodisplay

attenuation

.

provides a

ground

ground

probeisinternally

input

circuitisheldatground

connecting

resistor

formsaprecharging

allowstheinput

do

voltage

this

takes placeinthe

switch,

generated

pre-charge

the

to

will

network

external

canbedrawn

charging.The

used

whenever

source

applied

switch to

the

having a

.

probe

GND

tiptoa

.

tiptooscilloscope

for

the

input

coupling

tiptothe

seconds

for

signal

the

component

input

circuit.The

positionisabout

attenuation

the

waves

that

coupling

position

component

.

used

be

for

of

signals

that

referenceatthe

the

probe.The

disconnected

througha1

the

input

signal to

coupling

capacitor

levelofthe

any

large

voltage

notbeapplied

also

provides

circuit

by reducing

the

external

from

following

the

probe

differentdolevel

signal

source,

chassis

ground

capacitors

source

.

input

coupling

of

the

can

form

have

most

the

would

from

MA

signal

GND

tothe

tip

be

do

Trigger

can

of
obtained

trace

provide the
Operation

the

information

is
CH
power-line
Line

related

Source

Internal

Triggering.For

betriggered

the

trigger

from

displays,

correct

explanation

Operating

Basic

.

Triggering.LINE

Line

achievedbysimultaneously

2 buttons.The

voltagetothe

triggering

(multiple)tothe
providingastable
inacomplex

External

EXTINconnector

the
the

EXT
signal
stable

provide a
low

in

undesirable
signal

shaping
circuit

a

input

connector

sweepisthen
allows

changesofsignalsatvarious

is

examined

Trigger

Two

trigger

COUPLING
rejection

.

signaltoobtain

waveform

Triggering

positionofthe

mustbe
display.An

triggered

amplitude

signal

tracinginamplifiers,

circuits,

under

test

triggeredbythe

amplitude,

without

Coupling

methods

circuits

switches.Each

certain

of

to

Coupling.The

AC

nentofthe
components
general,
However,

components,

cy

trigger

below about

coupling

ac

the

if

provideabetter

most

applications

internally.IntheCH1and

SOURCE
the

vertical

special

switches,

deflection

considerations

the

system.For

mustbemade

display.Refertothe

in

the

Vertical

instructions

for

dual-trace

Display

positionofthe

depressing

LINE

is

useful

displayofa

position

line

connectsasample

the

input

when

Trigger generator

of
the

input

frequency.Itisalso useful

line-frequency

.

.Anexternal

signal

canbeusedtotrigger

SOURCE

time-related

external

display

for

correct

to

trigger

when

switch

the

displayed
signal

internal

the

triggering,orcontains

components.Itisalso useful

phase-shift

etc.The

canbeconnected
through

of

can

selective

trigger

the

display

signal

cableorsignal

a

time

relationship,

resetting

the

coupling the

be

selected

method

frequency

triggering

AC

position

signal.Signals

50

canbeused

signal

contains

LF

REJ

.

fromasingle

the

to

same

signalatall

in

points

trigger

trigger

with

permits

components

.

blocks the do

with

Hz

are

for

most

unwanted

COUPLING

controls

the

sweep

CH2positions

trigger

signal

Dual-Trace

portion
triggering

SOURCE

the

CH

switch

1
of

signalistime-

component

connected

the

sweep

.

The

external

signal

canbeused

signalistoo

when

networks,

wave-

pointinthe

external

trigger

probe.The

times

waveshape

or

the

circuittobe

.

signal to

the

trigger

selection

of

the

trigger

compo-

low-frequency

attenuated.In

applications

frequen-

switch

dual-

to
of

and

the

for

to

in

for

to

and

the

or

may

is

.

a

.

5.Set the

remainonscreen
be

measuredinthenormal

MAY

AC-GND-DC

so

1980

switchtoAC

theaccomponent

manner

The

display

.
of

the

.

signal

will
can

Low-Frequency

high-frequency

signals

and

Reject.TheLFREJ

signals

below

about5kHz

position

about5kHz.Dcisrejected

above

are

attenuated.When

passes

2-

all

7

OperatingInstructions-SC

from

triggering

for

providingastable display

components

Trigger

The

trigger

trigger

circuit

going

portion
switch
starts

is

with

complex

.

Slope

SLOPE

responds

of

in

the+(positive-going)

the

positive-going
the-(negative-going)
negative-going
cyclesofa
SLOPE

certain
of

switchisoften

portionofacycle

the

SLOPE

startsonthe

Trigger

The

trigger

the

on
triggered.When

the

trigger

trigger
region,

signal.When

the

pointonthe

select

the

Then

set

portion

signal

switchisimportanttoprovide a

desired

Level

LEVEL

triggering

the

circuit

trigger

trigger

trigger

the

LEVEL

counterclockwise

waveforms,

switch

on

the

trigger

position,

of

appearinthe

unimportant.However,ifonly a

slopeofthe

control

waveform

LEVEL

respondsata

the

circuit

signal.To

SOURCE,

control

the

until

point.

502

positionisuseful

this

the

of

high-frequency

determines

the

positive-goingornegative-

signal.When

position,

portionofthe

the

display

the

waveform.When
display,

istobedisplayed,

input

determines

at

which

controlisset

more

LEVEL

controlissetinthe

respondsata

set

the

starts

the

settingofthe

correct

signal

thevoltage

the

in

positive

more

LEVEL

waveform;in

the+region,

COUPLING,

fully

clockwise

display

startsatthe

whether

the

SLOPE

the

display

with

several

setting

display

.

level

sweep

pointonthe

negative

control,

and

SLOPE

and

rotate

desired

the

the

that

is

-

first

it

Use

rates

below

adequate

of

an

trigger

proper
sweep

Trigger

jumper

(CAL)isconnected

In

this

triggering
complex

be

changed

To

tation

normal
control
eliminated

Single
repetitiveorvaries
tional

avoid

.

this,
mode
signal

the

normal

modetodisplay signals

about20Hz.This

trigger

control

trigger

is

settings,

.

not

correctly triggered

Holdoff.By

in

the

HO

configuration,

on

aperiodicorirregular

digital

by

use

the

control,

signal

Also,

the

position,

as a

words)

.

qualified

first

since thereisno

placing the

Trigger Holdoff

the

(The

personnel

possiblebyadjusting

.

Now,

manner

rotate

counterclockwise

.

Sweep.When

display

use

can

also

may
the

be

the

in

amplitude,

produce

ngle-sweep

si

usedtophotograph

.

with

provides an

mode

as

well as

the

corrections

display

is

TRIG'D

light

off

.

internal

the

variable

sweep

variable

control

provides

signals

internal

jumper

.)

the

most

obtain

the

triggering

stable

controls

the Trigger Holdoff

any

remaining

until

signal tobedisplayed

time,aconven-

or

presentation.To

unstable

an

shape,

feature.The

non-repetitive

a

repetition

indication

without

when

the

HO-SWP

control

control

for stable

(such

as

only

should

presen-

the

in

variable

instability

is

not

single-sweep

of

.

is

Trigger

button

stable
Trigger

and
light

20 Hz, orinthe
sweep
When
running

Mode

Automatic

pushed

display

Level

an

adequate

indicates

the

When

generator

an

adequate
condition

Triggering.The

in)ofthe

when

the

trigger

LEVEL

portionofGeneral

trigger

when

trigger

signal

the

sweep

repetition rate

absenceofan

free-runs

trigger

signalisagain

ends

to

and

triggeredtoproduceastable

LEVEL

control

Normal
(AUTO
same

as

applied
sweep

.

generator

TRIG'D

triggered

Triggering

button

in

the

However,

light

.

setting)

is

indicates

.

Operationinthe

.

out) of

AUTO

the

position

whenatrigger

remains

off

when

AUTO

mode

position

switch

provides

controliscorrectly set

Operating

is

present.The

Information)

generatoristriggered

is

less

than

adequate

trigger

signal,

produceareference

applied,

sweep

the

display

(with

generator

the

normal

trigger

when

signalisnot

and

thereisno

the

sweep

mode

a

trigger

switchisthe

present,

display

generator

(AUTO

(see

TRIG'D

.

about

the

trace

the

free

correct

position

signal

the

.

The

Trigger
Set

position

a

manner
triggerona

amplitude
depress

RESET
sweep
After

"locked
the

.

produceasweep
To

is

press

Horizontal

rates

is

provides

settingsofthe
variable

is

sweep

To

use

circuit

the

AUTO

and

(for

the
button.The

andasingle

this

out"

sweep

prepare

and

The

SECONDS/DIV

for

controlisin

rates

the

single-sweep

will

respondtothe

and

obtain

the

random

signal

frequency

and

SINGL

SWP
trace

sweep

until

is

reset.The

generator

it

goes

;

the

circuit

release

the

Sweep

the

sweep

continuously

SECONDS/DIV

calibrated

mode,

SINGLE

best

signals

which

SWP

possible

set

is

as the

button

next

trigger

willbepresented

complete,

READY

circuit

has

out

after

for

another

RESET

button again

Rates

switch

generator.The

variable

fully

its

clockwise

.

first

make

event

be displayed

to

buttons to the out

displayinthe

the

trigger

approximately

press

will

signal).Then,

and

random

and

pulse

on

sweep

the

indicator

been

reset

and

the

sweep

single-sweep

.

selects

calibrated

variable

rates

sweep

switch.Only

position

sure the

normal

circuit
the

same

release

initiate
the

screen

generator

lightswhen

ready

is

is

complete

display,

sweep

control

between

when

are the

.

to

the
the

.

is

to

.

the
the

2-

@

MAY

8

1980

Operating

Instructions-SC

502

Sweep

ten

portion
equivalent lengthofthe

Magnification

The

sweep

The

.

center

visibleonthe

magnifier

expands

divisionofthe

magnified

divisions.Any10division
can

be

viewed

controltobring

To

use

the

display

graticule.Then

position.Use

the

magnified

When

the

is

determined

setting
set to

signal
time

the
an
of

by

.5p,the

X-Y

Operation

In

some

versus

base.The

SECONDS/DIV

external

display

by

adjusting

the

desired portion

the

magnified

which

istobe

pull

the

the

horizontal

portiontothe

SWPMAG

by

10.For

switchissettoon,

dividing

example,ifthe

magnified

applications,itis

another

AMP

(X-Y)
position

switch

signaltothe

.

the

sweepbya

unmagnified

screeninmagnified

sweep

ismorethan

portionofthe

the

sweep,

first

magnified

horizontal

the

into

move

factor

displayisthe

form.The

sweep

POSITION

viewing

the

portion
expandedtothe centerofthe
SWPMAG

POSITION

desired

the

sweep

switchtoits

controltomove

position

the

SECONDS/DIV

SECONDS/DIV

rateis0

.05

.

sweep

switch

switch

ps/div

desirabletodisplay

rather

than

against

the

internal

(fully-counterclockwise)

providesameans

horizontal amplifier

for

applying

for

this

area

.

type

of

100

.

of

out

rate

is

one

of

1.Set the

GND

and

2.Set the
and
or

variable
clockwise

display
several

lower
graticule
of

with
upperpeaks
line

the

set

6

vertical

VOLTS/DIV

3.Adjust

and

cyclesofthe

4.Turn

portionofthe

lines

the

waveform

the

horizontal

(see

desired

connect

desired

channel

divisionsofthe

position

Fig.2-3)

the

set

the

is

.

time-base

the

channel

below

isinthe

aligned

.

channel

the

signaltothe

channel

VOLTS/DIV

control

SECONDS/DIV

waveform

POSITION

waveform

center

the

POSITION

with

AC-GND-DC

AC-GND-DC

switchtodisplay

waveform.Check

for

the

triggering

.

coincides

horizontal

viewing

area.Move

controlsothat

the

center

input

connector

switchtoAC

channelisin

controls

control

switch

with

line,

vertical

for

so

and
the

switch

.

about

the

that
the

fully

a stable

to

display

that

the

oneofthe

thetop

display

the

one

of

reference

to

5

The

CHOP

positionofthe

used

for

dual

vertical

the

MODE

switch

Do

not

exceed

in

the

X-Y

measure phase

Above

this

measurement

phase

BASIC

The

making

OSCILLOSCOPE

following

basic

the

modeofoperation.This

differencesofsignalsupto

frequency,

information

measurements.These

describedindetail,

adaptedtothe
ment.Contact
representative

Peak-to-Peak

Tomake

following

requirementsofthe

your

for

additional

Voltage

peak-to-peak

procedure

:

NOTE

MODE

displays.The

will

not

produceacorrect display

horizontal

the

difficult

phase

.

scan

shiftin

describes

since

each

local

Tektronix

assistance

Measurements-AC

voltage

switch

must

position

ALT

areaofthe

mode

canbeused

about50kHz
system

the

APPLICATIONS

the

techniques

applications

application

individual

Field

Office

.

measurements,

be

of

.

graticule

to

makes

for

not

are

must be

measure-

or

use

the

.

Fig.2-S.Measuring

5.Measure

(divisions)

This

technique

measurements
waveform,

6.Multiply
5bythe

the

channel

attenuation

peak-to-peak

the

vertical

.

NOTE

may

betweenany

rather

than

peaktopeak

the

distance

VOLTS/DIV

factorofthe probe,ifoneisused

voltageofa

deflection

also

be

two

(in

divisions)

switch

waveform

frompeaktopeak

.

to

Also

make

on

the

instep

include

.

used

points

.

measured

setting

.

2-

MAY

@

1980

9











OperatingInstructions-SC

EXAMPLE:Assumeapeak-to-peak

4.6divisions

of
of5V.

Peak-to-

peak

volts

Ifanattenuator
of

the

InstantaneousVoltage

measure

To

use

the

following

1.Set the

GND

and

graticule (or

to

be measured
position
move
has

the

the

been

andachannel

4

=

(divisions)

probeisused,

above

equationbythe

the do

procedure

desired

position

other

selected reference

is

tracetothe

channel

established

POSITION

.6

the

502

X VOLTS/DIV

NOTE

Measurement-DC

levelata

:

channel

tracetothe

negative

top

lineofthe

.

VOLTS/DIV

5

(channel

setting)

multiply
attenuation

given

pointona

AC-GND-DC

with

respect

control

vertical

switch

=

right

the

factor

bottom

line).If

graticule.Do

after

this

deflection

setting

23

volts

side

.

waveform,

switch to

lineofthe

the voltage

ground,

to

not

reference

Vertical

distance

Fig.2-4

.

Multiply

6

.

factor of

.

Measuring

VOLTS/DIV

the

referencevoltage

channel
tion
following

ple)

NEEMEMENNE
_

""""

MMM
N

"""

EM

MER"""
EN

MENESSRHEN
NNEEMENEEE

MENEEMENNE

Reference

.

the
the

Peak-to-Peak Voltage

line

Instantaneous

distance

switch

probe,ifoneisused

do

measured

setting.Include the

"""

"

WER

voltage

with

in

Measurement

E

respecttoa

4 by the

step

(see

the note

1000-19

attenua-

exam-

To

measureavoltage
other than ground,
step1:

Set the

the

reference

position

2.Connect

desired
reference

couplingtoGND)

3.Set the

5or6
variable
clockwise

trols

4

.
reference
do

levelistobemeasured.For
measurement
pointA.

the

the

channel

canbecheckedatany

channel

vertical

forastable

Measure

divisionsofthe

VOLTS/DIV

position

line

and

is

make
AC-GND-DC
voltage

tracetothe reference

signaltothe

AC-GND-DC

.

VOLTS/DIV

control

.

Adjust the

display

the

distance

the

pointonthe

made

NOTE

level

with

the

switch

the input

to

switchtoDC

waveform.Check

for

time-base

.

in

between

respecttoa

following

input

timebysetting

switchtodisplay

the

divisions

waveformatwhich

example,inFig

the reference

changes

toDCand
connector,
line

.

connector.Set the

(the

channelisin

triggering

between

voltage

to

apply

then

ground

the

input

about

that

the

con-

2-4

.
line

the

fully

the
the
the

and

EXAMPLE:Assume
is4.6
VOLTS/DIV

waveform,

select
waveform

stable
sweep

waveforminless
display).RefertoFig.2-5

divisions,

Instan-

taneous

Voltage

Time

To

1.Connect

VOLTS/DIV

2.Set the

may

=

Period

measure

use

eitheracordoinput

.

display.Setthe

rate that

occurinthe

switch

(division)

Measurement

the

switchtodisplay

time-base

that

the

polarityispositive,

settingis2V.

4

.6

the time

following

the

signal to

SECONDS/DIV

will

permit

than

eight

first

the

vertical

(channel

X

VOLTS/DIV)

(period)

procedure

the

coupling,

about

triggering

displaying

divisions

and

last

.

distance

2

between

:

vertical

and

four

controlstoobtain

switchtothe
(some

graticule divisions

measured

the

=

two

pointsona

input

connector,

set

the

divisionsofthe

one

cycleofthe

non-linearity

channel

+9

.2

volts

channel

fastest

a

of

5

.Establish

waveformisabove

2-10

the

polarity.The

the

reference

voltageispositiveifthe

line

.

move
made

3

Adjust

.

the

to

points

the

the

between

center

desired

horizontal

channel

which

line.Adjust

POSITION

the

time

control

measurement

the

horizontal

@

MAY

to

is

1980



Fig.2-5

waveform

POSITION
within

NEEMENNEEN

NEENEENNEE

EMONNEWREE
NEWINNEMsm

MMMOMMMME

mmmmmmmmm

mmmammmam

Horizontal

1

distance

.

Measuring

.

the

timeduration

controltocenter

center

eight

divisionsofthe

the

j

(period)

between

time-measurement

graticute

1000-20

pointsona

points

.

2.Take

frequency

EXAMPLE

which

2-5,

Frequency

Risetime

Risetime

techniques
difference

made.The
measuring

waveform

1

.

Connect

Operating

of

__

between

to

the

measurements.The

which

gives

the

the

the

reciprocal

.

frequencyofthe

:

The

hasaperiodof0.5msis:

=

Measurement

as the

is

the
following
risetime

.

1

period

measurementsemploy

time-period

points

procedure

between

signal

the

Instructions-SC

periodtodetermine

signal

showninFig

1

0.5ms

10%

input

and

=2

basically

the

measurement

the

basic

90%

connector

the

method

pointsofthe

502

the

.

kHz

same

main

is

of

.

4

.

Measure

measurement
controlisfully

5.Multiply

settingofthe

EXAMPLE
between
the

SECONDS/DIV

formula

Period

horizontal

distance

(divisions)

The

Determining

:

the

time-measurement

:

=

X

periodis0.5ms

horizontal

the

points.Be

clockwise

the distance

SECONDS/DIV

Assume

switchisset

SECONDS/

DIV

switch

setting

.

Frequency

sure

.

that

=

distance

the

variable

measured

.

switch

the

horizontal

pointsisfive

to

(5)(0.1

between

SECONDS/DIV

in

step 4bythe

divisions

ms

.

.1

ms)

the

distance

Using

0.5ms

time

and

the

2.Set the desired

variable
five

graticute

stable
sweep

between
2-6)

VOLTS/DIV

divisionsinamplitude

3.Center

4.Set the
display.Set the

.

10096

the

line

with the

time-base

rate that

the

10%

I

I

096

channel

controltoproduceadisplay

display

channel

SECONDS/DIV

will

display

and

90%

VOLTS/DIV

.

about

the

Position

triggering

less

than

pointsonthe

1

center

controlstoobtain

switchtothe

waveform

point

switch

control

eight

and

exactly

horizontal

.

fastest

divisions

(see

Fig

a

.

The

time

measurement

determine
periodically
duration
procedure

1.Measure

describedinthe previous

@MAY

the

recurrent
(period) of
:

1980

frequencyofa

signalisthe

the

periodofone

technique

signal.The

one

cycle.Use

application

can

alsobeused

frequencyofa

reciprocalofthe time

the

following

cycleofthe

waveform

.

as

to

~t

Horizontal

I

Fig.2-6

distance

.

t

-b-)
1

Measuring

risetime

1878-37

.

2-

1 1







Operating

5.Adjust the

10%

the

6.Measure

and
control

7

settingofthe

EXAMPLE

between
SECONDS/DIV

Using

Rise-

time

period

Instructions-SC

pointofthe

graticule

90%

points.Be

is in

Multiply

.

the

the

=

horizontal
waveformtothe

.

horizontal

the

sure

the

fully

clockwise

the distance

SECONDS/DIV

:

Assume

10%and

period

horizontal

distance

(divisions)

90%

switchissetto1

formulatofind

502

Position

distance

the

measured

switch

that

the

pointsisfour

SECONDS/

X

DIV

switch

setting

controltomove

second

between
variable
position

in

.

horizontal

/is

.

risetime

vertical line

the

SECONDS/DIV

.

step 6

distance

divisions

:

=

(4)

(1

ps)=41~

by

and

the

10%

the

the

on

6.Set

about

7.Set

the
threeormore
if

possible

8

measurement
line

9

channel
horizontal

measurement

the

the

four

the

SECONDS/DIV

.

Adjust

.

.

Adjust

.

1

Measure

10

.

11.Multiply
SECONDS/DIV

channel

divisionsofdisplay

triggering

divisions

the

pointstothe

the

waveform

lineata

points

switch

channel

horizontal

vertical

the

horizontal

(see

the

measured
switch

VOLTS/DIV

controls

for

between

POSITION

(reference)

graticule

Fig.2-7)

.

waveform

forastable

sweep

a

the

center

POSITION

distance

.

distance

switchestoproduce

.

display.Set

rate

which

shows

measurement

controls

horizontal

controlsothe

crosses the

line

.

between

by the

points,

bring

to

reference

center

the

setting

the

two

of

The

risetimeis4

Difference

Time

The

SC

502

Oscilloscope

difference

measure

1.Set the

eitherACorDC.

2

.

general,
More
Vertical

3.Set the

channel
most

4.Connect
connector
input
lead

probes

connect

between

difference,

time

AC-GND-DC

Set

the

MODE

Chopismore

information

Displays

triggering

1orchannel2,whichever

stable

and

the

and

connector.The

that of

the

that

have

the

signal

,us

.

Measurements

permits

two

switch to

determining

on
in this

correct triggering

reference

the

comparison

startofthe

comparison

similar

to the

more

or

usethe

switchesofboth

suitable

section

switchestotrigger

signal

signal.Use

time-delay

input

measurement

separate events.To

following

either

low-frequency

for

the

.

channel

for

to the

signal

reference

connectors

procedure

CHOP

modeisgiven

the

channels

both

channel

the

to

signal

coaxial

characteristics

.

of

channels

ALT.In

or

signals

display

provides

1

channel

should

cables

time

:

under

on

the

.

input

to

or
to

Channel

(reference)

1

Channel

2

MENEENNEMN

NNEME

50%

Amplitude

level

.

Fig.2-7.Measuring

EXAMPLE:Assume

setto50
ment

2

Time

Delay

NEENEEMENE

MENEMENHE

.a>,asaassassa~ss~

aa

MENNEMENUE

/is

and

pointsisfour

SECONDS/

__

horizontal

the

divisions.Using

DIV

switch

setting

i~

time

difference

that

horizontal

X

distance=

(divisions)

MM

ENA

Horizontal

distance

between

SECONDS/DIV

the

distance

between

the

(50 ps)

i

two

formula

1878-3

pulses

switch

measure-

:

(4)=200

.

is

ps

the

signals

5.If
accountinthe

2-12

are opposite

final

calculation

polarity,

.

take

this

into

The

time

delayis200

Eis

.

@

MAY

1980



Multi-trace

Phase comparison between two

same
channels.This

can

be

system.To make
procedure

1.Set the

channels

Set the

2

.

general,
and

the
signals.More
given

3.Set
channel1or
most

stable

4.Connect
connector

connector.The
comparison

that

have

signalstothe

5.If

phase

calibration

Phase

frequency

methodofphase

used

uptothe

:

AC-GND-DC

either

to

MODE

CHOPismore

ALT

positionismore

informationondetermining

under

Vertical

the

triggering

channel2,whichever

and

the reference

and

comparison

signalintime.Use

similar

time-delay

input

the

signals

difference,

.

Difference

canbemade

frequency

comparison,

the

ACorDC

switch to

suitable

Displaysinthis

switches

correct triggering

reference

connectors

areofopposite

take

this into

Measurement

more

or

using

difference

switchesofthe

.

either

for

low-frequency

suitable for

to trigger

channel

for

signal to

signaltothe

signal

characteristicstoconnect

should

coaxial

.

polarity

account

signalsofthe

both

vertical

measurement

limit

section

the

the

of

use

the

following

amplifier

CHOP

both

or

ALT.In

high-frequency

the

mode

.

the

display

provides

channels

channel1input

channel2input

precede

cablesorprobes

dueto180°
in

the

vertical

signals

input

is

on

the

.

the
the

final

Channell

(reference)

Operating

Channel2

(lagging)

Instructions-SC

0KNERMaaaa

aaaal

MEMMMUM

//iaaa
~aaaa~a

s

ance

t

t

Fig.2-8.Measuring

10.Measure

responding

11.Multiply

45°/division

phase

EXAMPLE:Assume
division
2-8.Use

Phase

Differ-=differenceX(degrees/=(0

ence

pointsonthe

the

(sweep

difference

withasweep

the

formula

horizontalsweep

(divisions)

8

Divisions

(360°)

the

horizontal difference

waveforms

measured

rate)toobtain the

.

a

horizontal

rateof45°/divisionasshown

:

divisions)

M

Oaa/

.

!ia

tii

-~

phase

difference

distance

rate

.

MEA

f

(in

exact

differenceof0

.6)

1878-4

.

between

divisions)

(45°)

amount

in

=

cor-

27°

502

by

Fig

of

.6

.

6.Set
variable
and

7
Set the
displays

8.Move

with

9.Turn
cycleofthe
eight divisions
of

the

represents
45°/division).The

degreesas45°/division

@

MAY

the

VOLTS/DIV

five

about

.

Set

the

SECONDS/DIV

about

the

channel

the

graticule

1980

channel

controlssothe

divisionsinamplitude

triggering

one

cycleofthe

the

waveformstothe centerofthe

POSITION

variable

reference

45°

between

(see

Fig.2-8).Each

of

the

sweep

signal

VOLTS/DIV

.

controlsto

switch

SECONDS/DIV

thesecond

cycle (360°-8

rate

.

obtainastable

to a

waveform

controls

(channel1)occupies

.

andtenth

divisionofthe

can

be

switches

displays

sweep

control

statedinterms

and

are

rate

.

graticule

until

vertical

graticule

divisions

equal

display

exactly

the

that

one

lines

=

of

The

phase

difference

High

Resolution

More

accurate

madebyincreasing the
variable

.

easiest
sweep

with
450/division=10=4.5°/division.Fig.2-9

signalsasusedinFig.2-8,
control

divisions,

Phase

Differ-=difference

ence

The

SECONDS/DIV

waystoincrease

magnifier

EXAMPLE:If

the

magnifier,

pulled

the

horizontal

(divisions)

differenceis27°

phase

Phase

dual-trace

.

the

out

.

phase

27°

is

Measurement

sweep

control

the

sweep

rate

magnifier

the

Withahorizontal
differenceis:

magnified

sweep

Xrate=

(degrees/

division)

.

.

phase

rate

sweep

but

were

with

measurements
(without

setting).One

sweep

changing

rateiswith

increased10times

shows

X10

the

differenceofsix

(6)

the

rate

should

the

SWP

(4 .5°)=27°

can
of

same

MAG

be

the
the

X10

be

2-13



Operating

Fig.2-9

increased

.

Instructions-SC502

Channel

(reference)

1

NEMMENEWSM

ama

.

,W

W

""

4

WI"EE

.

1MENIffic

ENENNNEE

NEENEENES

1

Horizontal

difference

1

High-resolution

sweep

rate

phase

.

Channel

jNF

room

SIMMIMI

difference

2

"

"

Z

'

u"WeR

t'

1

measurement

1878-5

with

Unassigned
routing signals
applications

Section5).

in
in

PowerModule

provide
Power

tion

.

(see

specific

Module

REAR

pins

are

and

to

Rear

Interface

Oneormore

can

be

functions

instruction

INTERFACE

available

from

compartments

wired

between

manual

the

at

the

SC

ConnectorAssignments

with

for

rear

connector

502

for

specialized
multi-plug-

of

a

barriers
compartments.See

additional

installed

for

informa-

to

2-14

@

MAY

1980

Chapitre2-SC502

INSTRUCTIONS

LeSC502

usage

gdndral,
ments
sondes

la

P6105,

s6lectionner
la

P6105

Misean

LeSC502

Se

basant

la

commande

mettre

droitedupanneau

estunoscilloscope15MHz,

conqu

module

d'un

recommanddes

P6062Betla

soit

attdnuede10X.

place

est

surlafigure

MODE

I'appareiIanservice.Verifier

INTRODUCTION

pour

fonctionner

d'alimentationdela

pour

titre

utilisdes

P6060.La

une

attdnuation

livrd

dtalonndetpr
2-1,

installer

duSC502

avant

s'allume

surlaposition

double

traceetA

dans

deux

comparti-

sdrieTM500.Les

avecleSC

sonde

P6062B

1

Xou10Xtandis

de

¬t 6

titre

('oscilloscopeetplacer

quelevoyant

.

permet

mis an

ALT

secteur

502

sont

que

service

pour

de

fi

D'UTILISATION

REMARQUE

//

est

recommandddWeindrelemodule

avant

d'insdreroud'extraireleSC
timent.Des
niveaudela

gersadurdedevie

.

Ce

chapitre

des

commander

arcs

dlectriques

carte

enfichabledinterconnexionetabrd-

.

FONCTIONNEMENT

contient

du

une

panneau

d'alimentation

502

de son

peuventseproduire

brave

description

avant

.

des

compar-

au

prises

et

ADD

APR

1982

Fig.2-1.Installationatretraitdutiroir

.

French2-1

Instructions

d'utilisation

-SC502

Surlaface

VOL
lumineuse
balayage
sesh2heures),
des
le lorsdeA

avantetsour

TSIDIVetSECONDSIDI

metanvaleurlasensibilitd

sdlectionn6es.Les

situ6es

VOL

TSIDIV,fontapparaftrela

utilisation
fagon,lasurface colorde
la

commande
belayage
bien

ddlimit6es

les

jupesdes

tion.Ne

de

ces

Information

1.Couper,

tation

(position

duSC502

SECONDSIDI

expansde

ajout6es

boutons

pas

forcer

boutons

.

pourlamiseanfonctionnement

d'une

POWER

(commande

2.Pr6positionnement

INTENSITY
FOCUS
MODE
POSITION

CH1

CH2

CH1

VOLTS

.DIV 0,2

Variable

CH1AC-GND-DC
CH2VOLTS/DIV

Variable

CH2-AC-GND-DC

POSITION

(horizontale)
SECONDS/DIV
CAL/SWP

MAG
SINGLSWP
TRIGGERING

SLOPE

LEVEL
SOURCE
COUPL

NOTE

cheque

sons

dune

V,

zones

les

sonde

jupe

une

gris

jupesdes

(localisde

indiquelavitesse

V

utilisde

aux

(SWP

valeus

MAG).

amdliorentleconfort

les

positions

part,

1'alimentation

OFF)

MODE

des

m6caniques

d'autre

et

POW

sur

commandes

fond

tel

qu'il

CH1

mi-course

A

mi-course

A

position

en

droite)

A
DC

0,2
en

position

8

droite)

DC

mi-course

A

5m
h fond h

OFF

(bouton

&

mi-course
CH1
AUTO

des

boutons

zone

nette

la

vitesse

et

(locali-

foncd

comman-

sensibilitd

la

10X.De

10

&

meme

heures)

Les

zones

imprimdes

d'utilisa-

extrdmes

bonier

du

part,

I'alimentation

OFF)

.

gauche

A

est

6talonn6e(Afond

dtalonnde(hfond

droite

et

sorti)

et

de

vertica-

sous

de

Sur

d'alimen-

enclenchd

Ajuster

5

.

ce

quelatrace

A
gauche du

6.R6glerlacommande

sentation netteetbien

7.Ddbrancherlesignal
verticalementdesorte
taledumilieu

Verification

8.Ddplacer
et

demi

gnalducalibreur

9.La
de3divisionsetcontenir

du

r6seau

Visualisationdusignal

10

.Appuyer

les

positions

soitaucentredeI'6cran

r6ticule

.

I'6cran

de

de

I'6talonnage

verticalementlatrace

en-dessous

du

surlavoie1.

reprdsentation

de50

Hz

est

surlebouton

verticale

FOCUS

d6finie

d'entr6eetpositionnerlatrace

qu'elle

.

centrede1'6ccranetreconnecter

obtenue

5

.

de

verlesignalded6clenchement
pointded6clenchement
signaletde

Commande

.Relierunsignal

11

kHz

1

ligne

la

externe

surlabroche24A

I'entrdeZexterne),

tiroir

.

12

.Tourner

la
apparaisse.La

SC
ou
gnements

jusqu'i3cequ'une

gauche

Ceci

achivelaprocddure

502.Les

les

commander

manipulations

sont

surbrillance

expliqudes

correspondenth('intersection

horizontaleaumilieudur6ticule

de

I'intensit6

sinusoidal

(si

derribreleconnecteur

lentementlacommande

correspond

de

qui

n6cessitentdeplus

dans

horizontaledefagon

et

et

commence

afin

d'obtenir

.

coihcide

doit

d'une

avoir

aveclaligne

grande

une

cyclesdusignalsila

d6clenchement

TRIGGER

VIEWetobser-

.Led6partdusignal

rectangulairede5

ou

celle-ci

dtd cablde

a

d'alimentation

INTENSITY

snacr6e»ensurbrillance

trace

sommetsdusignal

aux

miseenfonctionnement

de

l'instrument

non

amples

le

chapitre

des

A

une

repr6-

horizon-

division

le

si-

amplitude

fr6quence

est

le

du

.

pour

titre

vers

du

expliqu6es

rensei-

gdndralit6s

V,

du

.

ici

.

3.Augmenter

qu'une

trace

soit

tredur6ticule

Connecter une

4

.

8laprise

(CAL)

French

2-2

la

commande

visible.La

.

sonde

d'entr6edela

INTENSITY

doit apparaisse

trace

1Xdelasortie

voie1.

jusqu'b

calibreur

du

ce

prosducen-

COMMANDES

Commande

Commande
trace

.

ET

CONNECTEURS

FOCUS.Permet

INTENSITY.Agit

d'obtenir

sur

la

une

trace

nette

luminosit6dela

APR

ADD

1982

.

Instructions

d'utilisation-SC

5®2

SC50

OSCILLOSCOPE

aw~tysmnt

TA

523nS

REV

MAR

1983

Fig.2-2

.

Commandesetconnecteurs

.

French

2-3



Instructions

O

O

d'utilisation

BoutonTRIGGER

gnalded6clenchementdubalayage

Commutateur

tionnement

terrupteur

PWR
p6e

CHI
CH2.La

ALT
La

voies Alafindechaque

lis
1

CHOP.Fonctionnement
La

(>250
layages

CH
et

POSITION
cal

Commutateur

verticals
(CAL)

deflexion

la

fenytre
une
nytre

Arrdt/Marche

OFF

.

.Lavoie1est

.

Fonctionnement

representation

pour

ms/div

representation

kHz).Mode
inf6rieures&1

1

MINUS

additionn6e

des

voies1at2.

(s6quence1,2,

dolt

ytalonns
claire

sonde

10X,

grise

.

-SC
VIEW.Visualise

MODE

I'amplificateur

de

L'alimentation

.

voie2est

est

les

vitesses

.

est

CH2.L'ervtrye

alg6briquement

CH1etCH2.Commandosdocadrage

VOLTS/DIV.Sslectionne

but6e

ytre

on

Lirelasensibility

.

avec

lirelasensibility

502

sur

I'saan

lesi-

.

SylectionneIsmodedefonc-

.

vertical.C'est

('instrument

de

internedutiroir est

miss an

missanservice

une

service

y

deux

traces

commutye

balayage

balayages

de

h

deux

commut6e

utilis

ms/div

5).La
6 droite

utilisationdesonde

des

pour

.

la

de

8lavoie1.

commands

pourunfacteur

verticale

entre

.

supyrieures

traces

entre

voie 2

aussi

.

.
.

(alterns)

les

deux

Gynsralement

s

(dscoups)

les

voles

vitessesdebe-

est

inverse

sensibility

la

Variable

verticale

dans

dons

1X.Avec

la

I'in-

cou-

.

uti-

.

verti-

de

fe-

to

Prise

du
frequence
ficateur

Commands
sur

I'ycran

Connecteur

~2tour

O

13de

14Commutateur

15Voyant

horizontal

plage

externe
position
(19)

.

Variable

CAL
tessedebalayage
teur

SECONDS/DIV

d6clenchement
bouton

visualises,

sion

de

balayage
(AMPL)
zontal.La
te

pour

la

jupedubouton

ge

normal.La
lourlavitesse

sedetemps
unique*

calibreur.Signal rectangulaire

100Hzpour

de

compenser

ou

POSITION.Cadrage

.

EXTTR

entrseded6clenchement.Le

ou

AC-DC

bouton

du

(CAL)/PULL

permetdefaire

entre

avecunretard

CAL

est

tiry,lavitesse

est

augmentye

SECONDS/DIV

horizontale

I'entrse

par

commands

vitesses

des

indiqueIsvitesse

surface

balayage

de

TRIG'D

est

READY.Allums,

d6clench6e

est
army

.

6talonnerIsgain

les

sondes

IG/AMPL.Acct's A

6

I'amplificateur

poussoirACdu

SWP

X10

varier

continuellement

deux

positionsducommuta-

.Uncavalier

variable

dansunfacteur10.

.

ouIsmode

externedeI'amplificateur

VAR

dolt ¬

stalonnses.La

colorde610

dilat6e

ou quolemode

de

.

horizontaldela

d6clenchement

MAC.Cette

interne

.

balayage,

de

Sslectionnelavitesse

Amplification

treanbutse

fenytre

utilises

heures

(X10)

indique

0,6VA

I'amplifica-

depend

permet

Lorsque

.

une

I'ampli-

de

trace

cou-

de

la

common-

la vi-

un

Is

par

divi-

hori­s

droi

claire

sous

balaya-

an

met

an

qualaba-

ebalayage

X

va-

Commando
sensibility
teur

Connecteur
appliqusIssignal

Commutateur

I'entr6edeI'amplificateur

de
signaux

Is

composante

Is

position
connect6edeIs
Cola
d'entrse.Dans
du

signal

French2-4

variable

verticals

VOLTS/DIV

sont coupids capacitivement

CND,1'entrse

permet

sont

CAL.Permet une

entre

deux

.

.

INPUT

de

Connecteur

d'entrse

AC-GND-DC

continue

prise

pr6chargerlacapacity

position

la

transmises

.

Sslectionnetocouplage

.

dans

signal

du

de

I'amplificateur

d'entr6e,

DC,

8

I'entr6e

variation

positions

BNC

sur

Is

position
s

1'amplificateur

est

bloqu6e.Dons

puis

miss

de couplage

toutes

les

I'amplificateur

de

de

la

commuta-

du

lequel

est

AC,

les

est

d6-

la

masse

6
composantes

.

Voyant

&

Bouton
la

Boutons

.

.

.

POWER.Allumy,IsSC

poussoir

basedetemps

poussoirs

AUTO

libreetla

sencedusignal

AUTO.Bouton

tialis

dss
qus.Aucune
signal

de
SINGLE

ton

AUTO

RESET

dans

Bouton

.

trace

qu'un

trace

d6clenchement
SWP.Bouton

sorti,

.

mode

Is

des

modes

poussoir

visualise

d6clenchement

de

poussoir

signaldedyclenchement

West

la

basedetemps

502

Appuyer

abalayage

d6clenchement

de

enfoncy,Isbalayage

sertder6fyrencean1'ab-

sorti,Isbalayage

visualisee
.

poussoir

aliments

est

dessus

unique*

.

I'absence

an

onfoncsetIs

estanmode

ADD

pour

est

APR

armer

.

est

appli-

.

.

est

ini-

de

bou-

1982

rbalayage
aucun
bouton

commando
titre

Boutons

unique*.Apr6slafindupremier

balayage

RESET.Dans

r6gl6e

ne pout

du

niveauded6clenchement

averlebouton

titre

le

visualisd

mode

AUTO

poussoirsdecouplage

balayage,

sans

presser

abalayage

unique*,

LEVEL

sorti

.

(COUPL).Couplent

le

la

doit

le

signalded6clenchementAI'entrdeducircuitdeddclen­chement

.

Bouton
capacitif
chement.La
et

50 Hz,

Bouton
au
du

poussoirAC.

des

signauxhI'entr6educircuitdeddclen-

Position

composante

les

signaux,

couplage

dontlafr6quence

sont

att6nuds

.

poussoirAC.

continu (DC).Toutes

Position

signalded6clenchement

continue

sont

tr6educircuitded6clenchement

Bouton
gnaux

circuitded6clenchement.La
est
f6rieure

poussoirLFREJ.Position

sont

coupl6s capacitivement

rejet6eetles

h 5 kHz,

signaux,

sont

att6nu6s

composante

dont

enfoncde,

(DC)

couplage
est

rejetde

est infdrieure

sortie,

correspond

les

composantes

transmiseshI'en­.

enfoncde,

6

I'entr6e

continue

fr6quence

la

est

.

6

les
du

in-

si-

.

non

affect6es

sede

huit

Chaque
De

plus,

sions

sur

an

vertical et

le

rdticule

I'6cranduTRC

Commande

La

brillance

La

plageder6glage

visible
cherhcette

par

I'erreur

divisionsanverticaletdix

division

chaque

repr6senteuncam
grande

les

lignes

centrales

les

vitesses

pour pouvoir

division

effectuer

.

d'intensitd

est

controlde

est

pr6r6gl6e

mais

pas

trop

lumineuse.II

commando

suivantlavitesse
suivantlaformedusignal
trop

lumineux

s'il

est

R6glage

Si

I'on

maintenu

pout

brOler

longtemps

trop

delafocalisation

ne pout

obtenir
aveclacommandoFOCUS,
n6cessaire

tu6

par

une

d'agir

personne

surler¬glage

qualifi6e)

Instructions

s'utilisation

dueauparallaxe.Le

divisionsenhorizontal

de

6,35

mm

comprend

cinq

verticaleethorizontale.Le

an horizontal

sont

dtalonnds

des mesures

parlacommando

de fagon

sera

visualis6.Un

phosphoredutube

le

quolatrace

n6cessairederetou-

balayage

de

point

immobile

.

une

repr6sentation

mimebfaible

interne

bien

intensit6,ilest

ASTIG

(r6glage

.

-SC

r6ticule

de

cotd

petites

d'apres

pr6cises

INTENSITY

ou

cathodique

d6finie

502

pos-

.

.

divi-

gain

sur

.

soit

et

effec-

2~

Boutons
signal
ment

qui

.

Bouton

poussoirs

est

poussoir
tillondusignaldela
ddclenchement

Bouton

poussoir
tillondusignaldela
ddclenchement

Rdseau (LINE).Les
et

CH2

sontenpositon
delatensiondurdseau
au

circuitdeddclenchement

Bouton

poussoir
eonnectdsAla
circuitdeddclenchement

Commutatour
ou descendants

21

ddmarrerunbalayage

Commande

de

clenchementleniveau qui

FONCTIONNEMENT

Rdticule

Le

rdticuleduSC

avantduTRC

pour

SOURCE.Ddterminent

I'origine

du

coupldAI'entrdeducircuitdeddclenche-

CH1.Position

voie1est

enfoncde,undchan-

coupldaucircuit

de

.

CH2.Position

voie2est

enfoncde,undchan-

coupldaucircuit

de

.

deux

boutons

enfoncde.Un

d'alimentation

poussoirs

dchantillon

est

transmis

CH1

.

EXT.Position

prise

EXT

TRIG

enfoncde,
sont

coupW

les

au

signaux

.

SLOPE.Sdlectionnelapente

surlesignaldeddclenchement

montante

pour

.

niveau.Sdlectionne

ddclencheralebalayage

502

est

gravel

intdrieurement

permettrederdaliser

sur

des

le

mesures

signaldedd-

.

surlaface

prdcises,

Pour

v6rifierler6glage
commando
Silerdglage
verticales
une

finesse

FOCUS

.

R6glage

Ce

rdglage

qualifide

.

Modulation
broche

La

modulation

pour

faire

une

reprdsentation

vertical

X) sans

signal
du

(axeY)et

toutefois

de

connecteur
traduire
pour

une
commando
ce

lorsque

que

cello-ci
peuvent
tension
te

maximale

sur

1'entrdeZde 0 A2MHz

ASTIG,

FOCUS,

ASTIG

jusqu'd

est

correctement

et horizontalesdela

extrdme

de

pourlamime

I'alignement

interne

doit

titre

tourner

I'obtention

reprdsentation

positiondela

delatrace

effectud

.

d'intensit6 (s'effectue

24Aaate

apparaitre

connect6e6cot

d'intensitd

une

(sur

information

obtenueApartir

d'un

signaldeddflexion

I'axeZ)peut

d'un

modifierlaformedela

modulationdeI'axeZappliqud

modifie

cette

information.L'amplitudedela

modulation

INTENSITY

cello-ci

est

allumee.Des

titre

obtenues

I'intensitddela

visible

.

Environ45V

est

dteinte

avec

d'entrde

ddpenddela

et-5V

modulationsendemi-teintes

des

signaux

est

de±10

.

lentement

rdglage

du

positionnd,

les

prdsenteront

commando

par

une

personne

seulementsila

effet)

.

titre

suppidmentaire

signaldeddflexion

horizontale
reprdsentation.Le
surlabroche

reprdsentation

tension

position

pour

pour

de

allumer

I'dteindre

intermddiaires

Vetla

bande

la

optimal

parties

utilisde

sur

(axe

24A

pour

requise

la

la

tra-

lors-

.

La

passan-

.

ADDAPR

1982

French2-5

Instructions

Calibreur

Le

signal
ge

ties
calibreur
compensation

les

manuelsdesonde.L'amplitude
A1%
cedusecteur

d'utilisation

calibreur
convenable

sensibilitis

prdsetla

est

bgalement

.

interneduSC

des

friquence

-SC

pour

effectuerlavdrification

verticalesetties

trds

sondes

suivantlaprocidure

utile

du

502

502

constitue

vitessesdebalayage.Le

pour

du

signal

est

une

rigler

les

calibreur

deux

foislafrdquen-

contenue

source

1'6talonna-

de

circuits

estde600

de

de

dans

mV

Afin

d'utiliseraumieux

prdcautions

1.Ne

pas
pas

2.Ne
huit

de

foislasensibilite

bilitd

verticale

titre

supdrieureA4V.

pourraient

entrainer

le

mode

est

0,5

devront

V/div,

Des

des

suivantes

appliquer
appliquerdesignaux

titre

sur

les

entries

verticale.Par

la

signaux

distorsions

((CH1

minus

CH2)),

prises

.

une

tension

excddent

qui

exemple,sila

tensiondusignalnedolt

plus

grande

de

.

excessive

I'dquivalent

sensi-

amplitude

les

.

pas

Repr6sentations

Reprdsentation

peut

titre

utilisde
entriesetmettrelecommutateur
respondante.Les
silectionner

des

la
sentation
une
que
balayage,
balayage

il

phase.Si
instable

tion
tion

les
vitesses
sualisation
supdrieures,
rer

peut
avec
tion

chrones
cas
de

la

somme

minerunsignal
ser
continueiTune

te

verticales

voies

Reprdsentationdedeux

commande

est

alternanceseproduisant

mode

le

le

infdrieuresd1

DanslapositionCH1ouCH2

possibledereprdsenter

sera

les

.

Reprisentationdedeux

CHOP

du

obtenueapartir

voies.En

infdrieures

en

reprisentation

la

En

mode

titre

obtenuenutilisant

les

signaux

identique

Le

mode

en

contraire

I'un
Somme

position

d'une

continuedusignalaobserver

deux

des

algibrique.Mettre
CH1

ouladiffdrencededeux

tensiondedicalage

verticales

d'une

seule

sdpariment

commutateurs

signaldediclenchement

le

.

MODE

obtenuedpartir

alternd

puisse

mode

dicoupiest

signaux

gindral,lemode

les

dicoupd, un

ddcoupd

respectantlarelationdetemps

ne sont

commutateur

d1ms/div

balayage

commutations

.

CH1

a

celle

(deux

signaux indipendants),

sera instable

MINUS

indisirable

ties

.

traces

est

placde

apris

lire

ms/div

pas

traces

MODE

commutation

d'une

unique.Aux

diclenchement

un

CH2.Ce

et

obtenue

permetdevisualiser

.

CH2.Ceci

(en

entries

afin

Chacune

trace

.

AppliquerlesignalATune

MODE

SOURCE

(mode

surlaposition

des

voies

chaque

utilisddtoutes

prdfdrable

.

commutateur

du

deux

signaux

en

phase,

(mode

permet

dicoupd

environ.C'estlecas

vitesses

sont

visibles et

signalenrelationdetemps

qui

donne

parund6clenchement

commutateur

le

permetderialiser

signaux,

commun)

mode

appliquant

(en

compenserlacomposan-

de

appliqud

des

deux

surlaposition

permettent de

sur

TuneouI'autre

alternd).Lorsque

ALT,lareprd-

CH1etCH2

balayage

respectant

I'un

ddooupd).La

ilectronique entre

doit dire

externe

deux

les

la

de

i3

.

vitesses

les

vitesses

aux

SOURCE,

deux

une

repr6senta-

utilisd,

d'une

de

balayage

peuvent

correct

une

reprdsenta-

signaux

liant.Dans

reprisentation

MODE

maniireaili-

ouidispo-

une

tension

1'autre

entrie)

suivant

Bien

voies

des

cor-

du

de

la

sera

posi-

aux

vi-

alti-

interne

syn-

le

sur

la

.

Afin

3

me
cesdemanidre

I'on

4.Pour
deux
surlamime

Sensibilitd verticale

L'importancedela

signal
par
VOLTS/DIV
dtalonnde

position

La

sensibilitd
et

de

Des
tudes
relics
xion

Le
11

est

prise
test

Couplage

.

mettentlechoixdumodedecouplage

Le

qui

continuedusignal
vant
quence
dredune

Danslecas

basses

a

inclinaison

d'utiliserlaplus

.

algdbrique,

commutelacommande

voies

appliqud

I'amplitude

commande

porterlasensibilitdiau

mesures
tant
ensemble

assurie

cordon

igalement

de

.

Les

commandes

type de

diterminentlemodedecouplage

DanslapositionAC(couplage

danslecircuit

les

commandes

que

chacune

obtenir

s'assurer

lorsquelacommande

enclenchde(hfond i

de fa~on

qua

de

masseduSC

est

attinuation

friquences,

une

mime

qua

les

position

par

de

reprdsentation

environ10Hzd-3dB.De

d'un
des

.

sensibiliti

sur

Tune

des

ce

signaletla

de

et

VARIABLE.La

Variable

continue

valables

l'oscilloscopeet1'uniti

par

masseenbout de

possible

I'entrde

paliers.Le

de

une

masse

les

sondesoules

d'assurer

502Ala

de

couplage

bloqude

est

d'entrie.La

ties

signal

carrel

cette

grande

de

des

MODE

riponseenfriquence

commandes

voies

position
sensibilitd

Variable

droite)

(CAL)

entre

moins50V/div

signauxnepeuvent

commune

sonde

masse

d'entrde

ddsirietla

paruncondensateursetrou-

rdponseducotd

composantes

comportant

attinuationsemanifeste par
couplage

dynamiqueensom-

plage

cadrage

traces

verticale

verticales

permet de

cables

devront

soit

de

CH1bCH2

AC-GND-DC

produite

des

(CAL)

.

les

positions

sous

an

amenant

est

la

liaisonanriunissant

la

I'iquipement sous

de

(AC-GND-DC)

ties

nature

utiliser

a

alternatif)lacomposante

ce

faitilfaut

voisines

ties

alternatif

titre

centrie,

est

verticale

faire varier

testnesont

plus

meilleure

signaux

lorsque

.

sur

par

diterminde

commandes

est

est

sur

dtalonndes

.

pas

titre

la

de

les

appliquds

du

signal appli-

.

basse

de 10

composantes

(position

signaux

s'atten-

pla-

les

sont

un

la

la

effec-

pas

conne­masse

per-

fre-

.

Hz

une

AC)

.

.

la

.

French

2-6

ADD

APR

1982

doit

titre

utilise

pourlarepresentationdesignaux
comportant
rehI'amplitudedela

une

composante

continue d'amplitude

composante

alternative

alternatifs

.

supdrieu-

reportera
sentations

aux

explications

verticales»

Instructions

faites

.

d'utilisation

danslechapitre

-SC502

xRepre-

La

positionDC(couplage
plupart
mesurerlacomposante
pour
A

tion

niveaudela

delasonde Alamasse.Le
connecte

masse

teur

gnalbla
rationdepre-charge.Cette operation
condensateurdeliaisonhla

nuedusignal

commutateur
celle-cinesera

I'amplificateur.Le

de
chargedela
sed
sourcedesignal

prdcedemment

ties

applications.Ce

representer

environ50Hzetqui

averuncouplage

La

position

par

vertical

Denslaposition

massebtravers

courantseprocluisant

lorsque

les

signaux

GND

permetdedisposer

masse

sans

intdrieurementducircuit

une

resistancede1MR.

est

maintenuauniveaudela

GND,lefaitdeconnecter

appliqud.De

AC-GND-DC

pas

appliqude

circuitdepre-charge

capacitd.La

I'on

dolt

relier

ayantunniveau

appliqud

continu)

modedecouplage

continuedusignaletdoit

ayant

une

subiraient

alternatif

devoir

une

surlasourcedesignal
procedure

.

normalement

.

relier

signal

appliqudhla

L'entrdede1'amplifica-

resistancede1

tensiondela

plus,

danslaposition

et

quelle

directement6I'entree

1'extrdmitddela

continu

est

utilisable

permet

titre

frequence

d'une

exterieurement

d'entreeetest

masse

permetdecharger

composante

que

soitlasurtension,

limite aussi

suivante

differentdecelui

inferieure

une

reference

sonde

.

1'entrdedusi-

M12

est

GND

lorsdela

devra

sondeaune

clans

la

de

utilise

attenua-

au

I'entrde

est

dd-

relict6la

une

ope­le

conti-

du

de
I'appel

titre

utili-

Declenchement6partirdureseau.Lorsque

CH1etCH2

declenchementsefait8partirdureseau.La

le
NE

connecte
nerateurdedeclenchement.Le
reseau

temps

aussi utilise

gnal

complexe

Ddclenchement

pliqudAla

clenchementdubalayage
se

trouve surlaposition

terne
observer

ble.Un

lorsquelesignaldedeclenchement

amplitude
tes

sur
mentseproduise.II
levdsdesignaux

circuitsdemiseanforme

prelevd
EXT

caslebalayage
signal,cequi

plitudedela

differents
des de

du

commutateur

une

partiedusignaldureseauAI'entreeduge-

est

utilise

lorsquelesignal

averlereseau

pour

prise

doit se

trouver

pour
signal

insuffisanteoulorsqu'il

lesquellesilWest pas

suruncircuit

TRIG

paruncable5012oupar

formeouties

points

declenchement

(multipleousous-multiple).Ceci

visualiserlacomposante50Hz

.

externe.Le

EXT

IN

an

qua

I'on

puisse

peut

dtre

devra

sur

les

sous

est

declenchd continuellement

permet

d'examiner

d'un

circuit
.

SOURCE

declenchementhpartir

d'entrde

signal

d'origine

peut

lorsquelacommande

EXT.Le

relationdephase

utilise

dgalement

amplificateurs

etc.. .Lesignaldedeclenchement

test

relations

utilise

titre

signal

obtenir

souhaitable

sans

une

pour

ddclencherlebalayage

interne

comporte

titre

rdseaux

peut

titre

une

modificationsdeI'am-

les

de

avoirerdajuster

les

boutons

ne

sont

pas

engages,

position

estenrelation

surunsi-

externe
assurerlede-

pour

SOURCE

declenchement

de

averlesignal

representation

prdsente

queledeclenche-

utilise lorsdere-

appliquehla

sonde.Dans

temps

une

ties

composan-

ddphaseurs,

mdme

par

le

des

signaux

les

LI-

du

de

est

ap-

ex-

h

sta-

prise

ce

en

comman-

,

1.Avantderelierlasonde8une

le

commutateur

2.Relier
quelques
charge

.

3.Relierlasondedla

Attendre

4

.

couplagesecharge

5.Placer

La

representation

alternativedusignal
tuelle.

Sources

Declenchement

balayage

le
sitons

CH1etCH2ducommutateurSOURCE,

declenchement

cale.Pour une

AC-GND-DC

I'extrdmitddela

secondes

de

queleconclensateurdecouplagesedd-

quelques

.

commancle

la

demeurera

pourra

d6clenchement

interne.Danslaplupart

peut

titre

declenchd

est

prdlevd

representationedeux

source

seconcles

AC-GND-DC

surlesystdmededeflexion

source

position

sur

la

sonde8la

sur

titre

mesureedela

intdrieurement.Dens

masse.Attendre

signal

de

I'dcranetla

.

quelecondensateur

surlapositionAC.

traces,

signal,

de

GND

composante

des

l'utilisateur se

placer

.

maniere

applications

les

le

signal

de

habi-

po-

de

verti-

Couplage

Deux

au

commutateur
selectionneroude
de

declenchement

Couplage

continuedusignaldedeclenchement

gnaux

50Hzseront
plus

des

frequences

le

commutateur

Rejection

laisse
5

kHz
frdquence
clenchement
lisde

tes

hautes

de

d6clenchement

possibilitdsdecouplage

COUPLING.Chaque

rejeter

.

alternatif.Surlaposition

avec

des

composantes

attdnuds

usite.Cependant,sile

des

passer

tous

.Lacomposante

infdrieure

surunsignal

pour

visualiser
frequences

.En

non

ddsirees,ilest

surlaposition

basses

frequences.La

les

signauxdefrequence

continue

e 5

kHz

une

representation

.

peuvent

certaines

basses

generallecouplageACest

signaldedeclenchement

COUPLING

est

sont

complexe,

dire

utilisdes

possibilitd

frdquences

AC,lacomposante

sera

frequences

preferabledepositionner

positionLFR

rejeteeetles

attenuds.Lors

cette

stable

surlesignal

dliminde.Des

LF

superieure

position

ties

permet de

autour

contient

REJ

.

signaux
d'un

est

composan-

grace

si-

de

le

EJ
e

de

de-

uti-

ADD

APR

1982

French

2-

7

Instructions

d'utilisation

-SC

502

Penteded6clenchement

La

commande
tivedusignal
chement.Lorsque

+
pente

part
gnal

le
portance.Par
fraction
d'importance
delareprisentation

montant)ledipartdubalayage

(front

montantedusignal;surlapositon

balayageseproduit

du

.Sila

choixdela

d'un

SLOPE

diclenchement

de

reprisentation

pente de
contre,

cycle,lapositiondela

primordiale

ditermine

la

commande

comporte

diclenchement

silareprisentationnecomporte

car

surlapente

Niveauded6clenchement

La

commande

le

signal

de
partdubalayage
cie

verslapartie

ra6un

niveau

ment.Lorsque

partie,ledipartdela

niveaudetension
Avantdepositionner

diclenchement

ce

de
la
fond

le

SLOPE.Ensuite

pente

droite et

e

balayage

LEVEL

diclenchementapartir

Lorsquelacommande

.

+,ledipartdela

tension

de

commande

la

inferieur

tourner

parteaupoint

ditermineleniveau

supirieur

reprisentation
la

commande

SOURCE,

mettre

celle-ci

la

sur

laquellealieu

SLOPE

surlapartie

plusieurs

elle

permet

disirie

duquel

reprisentation

sur

LEVEL

surlesignal

LEVEL,

le

couplage

commande

la

vers

desire

.

pente

positiveouniga-

le

est

se

nigative

descendantedusi-

est

souvent

commande

de

du

LEVEL

signaldediclenche-

le

est

deplacie

produira

se

de

la

gauche

position

sur

la

produit

(-)led6-

cyclesdusignal

sans

SLOPE

placerledipart

cyclehobserver

tension

de

produiraledi-

se

est

se

versla.

alorsiun

diclenchement

choisirlasour-

COUPLING,

LEVEL

jusqu'eceque

diclen-

sur

la

im-

qu'une

est

dipla-

produi-

e

sur

.

et

Utiliserlemode

friquence

la
formation
que

prisentation

voyant

correct

interne

ge

variable

tard

.

chement

des

cavalier

obtenirlameilleure

commander

de

nationdeI'instabiliti

repetitifoulorsque
de
une
titre
mode
phinomines

surlaxqualitindusignal

les

correctionshapporter,

sur

TRIG'D

.

riglabledediclenchement.En

Retard

(HO-SWP)

(CAL)

diclenchement.Elle

de

sur

siquences

doit

Cette

commande

retard

du

Balayage unique.Lorsque

ripitition

reprisentation

obtenue

(SINGLE

normal pour

est

infirieureA20 Hz.Ce

sur

1'icran

sans

ne

s'allume

position

sur

la

utilisieencommande

est

signal

un

numiriques complexes).Le

itre

de

diclenchement

varientilWest

dans
non

non

effectui

s'utiliseendeux

reprisentation

diclenchement.Puis

restante

son

amplitude,saformeousa

stable.Une

ce

carenutilisantlebalayage

SWEEP)

rip4titifs

visualiser

cariln'y

diclenchement

un

le

pas

si

HO,lacommande

permetdestabiliser le

piriodiqueouirregulier

par

permet

personne

une

verslagauche

.

le

signaliobserver

pas

possible

reprisentation

ainsi

.

des

signaux

donne

pasdere-

correct.Le

commande

la

nest

stable

unique.Ce

une

nest

de

diclen-

(tel

.

les

I'elimi-

friquence

sur

peut

mode
diclenchement

de

aura

diclenchement

plagantlecavalier

variabledere-

diplacementdece

qualifiee

temps.Premierement,

stableenreglant

tourner

jusqu'i

d'obtenir

photographier

de

dont

in-

ainsi

pas

balaya-

que

pas
I'icran

les

Mode

de

d6clenchement

Diclenchement

AUTO

enfonct)

reprisentation

une
correctement

chement.La

est

temps

Lorsquelafriquencede

ment

est infirieurea20
chement
tracederiference
chement
basedetemps
tation

stable

de

LEVEL)

Diclenchement

ton

AUTO

de

diclenchement

ne

dimarre
TRIG'D
correctement

du

positionnee

lampe

diclenchie

est

incorrect,

.

correct,

s'allume

la

diclenchse

est

(avec

.

relachs),lebalayage

pasetil

lorsquelabase

.

automatique.La

commutateur

stable,

lorsque

et

TRIG'D

.

ripititiondusignal

Hzou

la

basedetemps

Des

I'application

basedetemps

un

positionnement

normal.Dans

.

Sanscesignal,

n'yapasdevisualisation

position

diclenchement

de

commande

la

lorsqu'il

s'allume

afin

y aunsignaldediclen-

lorsquelabase

lorsquelesignal

relaxe

d'un

s'arrete

produire

de

correctdela

position

la

produitechaque

se

ginirateurdebalayage

le

temps

de

(bouton

AUTO

produit

LEVEL

de

de

et

signaldediclen-

relaxeretla

de

une

normale

.

Le voyant

est

diclenchse

est

de

diclenche-

diclen-

produit

reprisen-

comman-

(bou-

signal

une

utiliser

Pour

le

circuit

licher

les

reprisentation

leure

commander

les
plitude

et

.

server)
et
clenchement

I'icran.Apreslafindece
est

Le voyant
pretieffectuer
chaque
tionencoup

Enclencher

relacher

inhibs

findebalayage

lemode

diclenchement

de

boutons

la

jusqu'8

AUTO

possible

de

diclenchement

friquence

bouton

le

dimarreraunbalayage

READY

unique,

sont

ensuitelebouton

RESET.La

prochaine

la

s'allume

nouveau

un

.

presseretrelacher

Vitessesdebalayage

La

commande
lonnses
met

deux

sesdebalayage
CAL

du

variation

une

positions

tournee

est

SECONDS/DIV

ginerateurdebalayage.La

continuedela

commutateur

du

ne

sont

e fond

4(Balayage

ripond au

et

SINGLE

voisines

balayage,

lorsque
balayage.Ce

Afindepreparer

italonnies

versladroite

unique)),

(pour

un

avecunsignal

de

prochaine

unique

le

pression

I'appareil

selectionne

vitesse

SECONDS/DIV

que

signal

SWPetobtenirlameil-

signal aleatoire,

SINGLE

ginerateurdebalayage

.

s'assurer

e

visualiser.Re-

cellesdusignaleob-

SWP,
impulsiondedi­represents

surlebouton

est

voyant

autre

une

bouton

le

les

commande

balayage

de

lorsquelacommande

que

rigler

dont

I'am

presser

sur

RESET

et

arms

s'iteindra

visualisa-

RESET

vitesses

CAL

per-

entre

.

Les

vites-

.

est

e

.

ita-

French2-8

ADDAPR

1982

Instructions

d'utilisation

-SC

502

Expanseur

L'expanseur

layage.La

trale

correspondraAla
lentedubalayage
Une

fraction

sions

nement

tie

du

Pour
tiedela
ticule
POSITION

Lorsquelacommande
sedebalayage
delavitessedebalayage

SECONDSIDIV

dquivalenteanmode

Fonctionnementen

Certaines
signal
balayage
commutateur
externei3I'amplificateur

de

balayage

permetdemultiplier

partiedubalayage

expansd

quelconquedubalayage

peut

titre

visualisdeanr6glantlacommande

horizontal

signali3observer

utiliser
reprdsentation

tirer

puis

par

rapport

interne.La

de

('expansiondubalayage,
le

bouton

horizontale

aquivalente

se

trouve

applications

A un

SECONDS/DIV

partie

maniereAamener

.

devant
pour

par10.

expanses

XY

autre

position

REMARQUE

La

position
utilisee
la

position

recte

CHOP

du commutateur

pourlareprdsentationdedeux

ALTlavisualisationneserait

.

par dixlavitessedeba­comprise dansladivision
agrandie.La

est

sup6rieure

We

SWP

MAG.Utiliserlacommande

d6placerlareprdsentation

SWP

MAG

est

obtenue

Par

surlaposition

est

0,05

n6cessitentlarepr6sentation

plut6t

AMP

permet

horizontal

longueur

100

8

reprdsentant10divi-

dans

positionnerlapar-

agrandieaucentredurd-

est

tiree

divisant

en

example,lacommande

0,5psetla

ps/div

qua

par

rapport

(i3

fond A

d'appliquerunsignal

.

MODE

traces,

pas

6quiva-

divisions

de

I'dcranlapar-

(X10),lavites-

1'indication

.

A un

droite)

sera

sur

cor-

cen-

.

position-

.

vitesse

d'un

du

1.Positionnerlecommutateur
Wectionnde
tr6e

.

2.Positionnerlecommutateur
choisie
VOLTS/DIV
grandes

3.Rtsgler
de

balayage

tion

stabledeplusieurs

4.Agir

reAfaire

avec

I'une

rieure
rizontale)

gne

centrale

sur

GNDetappliquerlesignalAla

surACet

divisions

coihciderlapartie
rdticule,

du

choisir

afin

d'obtenir

.

les

commandes

(SECONDS/DIV)

surlacommande

des

lignes

puis

pour

centrer

verticaledur6ticule

Positionnement
Iigne

pdriodesdusignal

horizontales

agir

l'une

centrale

MENSM
MEMEMNEEN

RNMERNMERN

Diflexion

verticale

UNNNNIMEMM
WMENREMEME
MEMMEEMWME

ENNUMMUMEN
MONNEENEEN

AC-GND-DC

AC-GND-DC

une

positiondela

une

d6flexion

d6clenchementetde

de

pour

POSITION
infdrieuredela

situ6es

surlacommandePOSITION

des

crates

(voir

sur

verticale

verticale

obtenir

.

de

danslamoiti6

supdrieures

Fig.2-3)

la

commande

une

la

voiedemanie-

repr6sentation

delavoie

borne

d'en-

voie

de

la
de 5 A 6

vitesse

representa-

inf&

sur

la

1

.

TF1000-18

(ho-

li-

Ne

pas

d6passerlalargeur

tionXY.

sures

de

rieure650

de phasedusystdme

Les

paragraphes

titre

utilis6es
plications
mesure

fait

&

I'agence

complesmentaire

repr6sentation

Cette

diff6rencesdephase de

kHz.Au

pour

effectuer

ne sont

locale

appel

pas

h des

Tektronix

.

Mesuresdetension

Pour mesurer

dure

suivante

APR

ADD

1982

une

.

rdticule

du

peut

signauxdefr6quence

dessusdeCette

rend

les

mesures

APPLICATION

suivants

d6crivent
des

mesures

d6critesenddtail

dispositions

pour

crfite-h-crfite

tension

crate-b-crate,

aveclarepr6senta-

titre

utilisee

fr6quence,lavariation

difficiles

les

car

particulidres.S'adresser

obtenir

en

pour

.

techniques

classiques.Ces

cheque

tout

devant

cas

renseignement

alternatif

utiliserlaprocd-

les

inf6-

ap-

de

me-

Fig.2-3.MesuredeIs

Mesurer

5

.

divisions
est surlaposition

dicationdela
du
se

4,6

VOLTS/DIV

apres

Cette

mdthode

sion

entre

plut6t

qualavaleur

6.Multiplierladistance
facteur

.

Example

d'attdnuationdela

divisions

tension

I'amplitude

s'etre assures

dtalonn6e

permet

deux

points

commande

:

supposons

(voir

Fig.2-2),1'indication

est5V

w#te-il-wifedusignal

crate-b-cr¬tedela

qualacommande

.

.

desflexion

VARIABLE

REMARQUE

dgalementdemesurerlaten-

quelconques

crefte-&-trite

mesurise

VOLTS/DIV

sonde,

qualadesviation

dun

signal,

.

paragraphe5par

au

tenant

an

si

une

sonde

verticale

la

commande

de

French2-9

compte

est

soit

en

('in-

utili-

de





X2







-SC

Instructions

d'utilisation

502

Tension 4,6

aete-h-crate=(divisionsX(indication

en

an

volts

verticales)tateur

volts/div)

REMAROUE

Si

une

sonde

att6nuatrice

rdsultat

Mesures

Pour mesurerleniveau
signal,

un

1.Positionnerlecommuateur

faire
tout

rapport&la
la

moitie

de

POSITION

ci-dessus

d'une

utiliserlaprocedure

coihciderlatrace

autre signedereference).Silatension

superieuredureticule.Ne

parlerapport

tension

masse,

choisir

(verticale)

est

utilisee,

continue

continu

suivante

surlaligne

une

lignedereference

parlasuite

multiplier

d'att6nuation

instantan6e

d'un

point

AC-GND-DC

inferieuredureticule

plus

agir

.

REMAROUE

Pour

mesurerunniveaudetension

point

dontlepotential

apporter

les

corrections

est

suivantes

placerlacommandedecouplage

et

appliquerlatensiondereference
tree.Amener
lignedereference

2-

AppliquerlesignalAla

de

deflexion

GND-DC
la

ligne

de

3.Choisir

5ou6

divisions

CAL

(bouton
Ajuster
nir

referenceetle
Par
tuee

positive

dication

facteur

divisions,
la

les

une

representation

4.Mesurerladistanceandivisions
example, danslecardela

entrelalignedereferenceetle

Determinerlapolaritedela

5

.

si le

6.Multiplierladistance
d'attenuationdela

Example:supposons

commande

alorslatrace

.

verticale

surDC.

de

qualapolarite

(11

est

reference

commander

signal

la

zeroanplacantlacommande

une

position

verticales

rouge)dela

pointdusignal

est

commande

VOLTS/DIV

an

prise

positionnerlecommutateur

et

possibledeverifier

VOLTS/DIV

signal.Verifier

du

voie
declenchement

de

.

stable

figure

au-dessusdela

mesuree

VOLTS/DIV

sonde,siune

qualadistance

est

positive,etqua

est2V

par

diffcirent

de
paragraphe

au

surlaposition

Jlaprise

coibcidence

d'entreedeTune

de fagon 8

choisie

estAfondAdroite

separant

faisant

I'objet

2A,lamesure

pointA.

tension.La

ligne

paragraphe4par

au

an

mesuree

.

5

commu-=23V

du

le

.

particulier

GND

sur

negative

est

situee

surlacomman-

.4

rapport

la

un

masse,

1

DC

den-

avec

la

des

AC-

A tout

moment
sur

visualiser

qualevariable

de fagoneobte-

la

ligne

la

mesure

de

est

tension

reference

de

tenant

sonde

l'indication

compte

est

utilisee

estde4,6

est

sur

et

(ou

par

dans

voles

GND)

.

de

.

effec-

.

I'in-

du

.

de

Distance
verticals

Fig.2-4.Mesure

de

r6f6rence

Tension__4,6

instantanee

Mesures

mesurerletemps

Pour

un

signal,

1.Appliquer

lectionner

VOLTS/DIV

.

viron4divisions

Regler

2

.

temps

pour

commande
balayage

separant
visionsdela
peuvent

du

amener
la
de
danslazone des

S'assurer
fond e

vitessedebalayage

soitlaplus rapide
les

apparaitre

reticule).Voir

3.Reglerlacommande

les

ligne

centrale

POSITION

4.Mesurerladistance
droite

5.Multiplierladistance

ENEENEEMEN
MENNEEMENN

NEWEEMEMEN

Ligneder6f6rence

instanten6a

.

(divisions
verticales)

de

temps

proceder

le

un

couplageACouDC.

de

manierehobtenir
.

les

commander

obtenir

SECONDS/DIV

deux

deflexion

points

horizontale

(horizontale)

huit

qualacommande

.

d'une

(periode)

comma

signal

surlaprise

une

representation

pointsdemesure

horizontale

danslapremiere

figure

2-5

faisant

divisions

horizontale

affichee

TF1000-19

tension

per

rapport6une

(indicationducommu­tateuranvolts/div

separant

suit

d'entree

Regler

la

representation

une

de

declenchement

stable.Regler

de maniere

possible

.

POSITION

I'objet

reticule.Agir

du
pour

centrales

variable

mesureeauparagraphe4par

(SECONDS/D

quelavitesse

telle

mais

inferieureehuit

soit

problemesdelinearite

(des

la

derniere

et

(verticale)demaniere

la

mesuredetemps

de

amener

ces

horizontales

separant

SECONDS/DIV

IV)

=

points

deux

verticale

commande

delabase

queladistance

division

surlacomman­deux

points

les

deux

.

tension

+9,2

et

d'en-

la

de

sur

.

points

est

V

sur

se-

de

di-

i3

.

e

la

French

2-1

0

ADDAPR

1982





Fig.2-5.Mesuredutemps

Example:supposons
points
est

positionne

estde5

divisions.Le

sur 0,1ms.

I

I

Distance

I

horizontele

sbparant

doux

qualadistance

commutateur

Utiliserlaformula

!

I I I

}j

points

surIssignal

horizontale

TF1000-20

.

entre

SECONDS/DIV

suivante

1.Appliquerlesignali3la

2.R6gler

qualarepr6sentation

d'amplitude

3.Centrer

gne

centraie

POSITION

4.R6gler
obtenir

pour

SECONDS/DIV
soitlaplus rapide

les

points10%et90%soit

xion

horizontale

5.Reglerlacommande
niereAamenerlepoint
ticale

du

les

Mesurerladistance horizontale

6

.

S'assurer

90%.

position

Instructions

prise

les

commander

.

approximativement

horizontaledur6ticulebI'aidedela

(verticale)

les

commander

une

repr6sentation

de mani6re

possible

(voir

reticule

.

quelevariable

etalonnee

(A

VOLTS/DIV

occupe

exactement

.

de

qualavitessedebalayage

mais

inf6rieurei38

Fig

.

2-6)
POSITION

10%du

fondi3droite)

d'utilisation

d'entrde

la

reprdsentation

d6clenchementdubalayage

stable.R6gler

qualadistance

telle

.

(horizontale)dema-

signal

surla2eme

entre

SECONDS/DIV

.

-SC

502

.

et

CAL

de maniere

cinq

divisions

surlali-

commande

commande

la

s6parant

divisionsdedefle-

ligne

ver-

les

points10%

(CAL)

soit

et

en

Periode
Distance

horizontaleXla

(divisions)

Determination

quence
riodique
Utiliserlaprocedure

que

de

2-5

Frsquence

Mesures

La

nisre
difference
csdure

une

10%et90%deI'amplitudedusignal

=

Indication

commande

SECONDS/DIV

La

pdriode

Les

1.Mesurerladuree d'une
precedemment

2.Obtenirlafrequence en

.

Exemple:la

est

mesuredutempsdemontse

qua

mesuredetemps

estde0,5

delafr6quence

mesures de

d'un

est

0,5

du

la

concerns

suivante

temps

signal.La frequenced'un

('inversedela

.

periods

rns.Sa

frsquence

=

pdriode0,5

temps

mesure

donne

de

ms

peuvent

duree

suivante

du

de

montde

intervalledetemps.La

d'un

les

points

lee

indications

demont6e

=

an

.

servirAdeterminerlafre-

(periode)

pdriodedusignal

prenant

signal

represents

est

donnse

=2kHz

ms

s'effectuedela

dslimitantlamesure.La

entre

(5).(0,1ms)=0,5

signal

recurrent

d'un

cycle

complet

comme

('inversedela

surlafigure

la

par

utiles

pour

lee

points

.

perio-

relation

meme

principals

effectuer

situss

ms

pe-

indi-

ma-

pro-

A

Multiplierladistance

7

.

indiquee

valeur

Example:supposons

et90%

DIV
verletempsdemontee

Temps

montee

.

soit

soit

de=

tempsdemontee

Le

surlecommutateur

de 6

divisionsetqua

sur1us.Utiliserlaformula

distance
horizontaleXcommutateur
(divisions)

(4)

I

.(1

ps)=4

=

MEMO
XNEURRE

100%

MrjMMKMMMMM

0%

ME

Distance

14

I

hnriznntala

Fig.2-6.Maturedutempsdemontga

mesureeaupragraphe6par

SECONDS/DIV

qualadistance

.

Indication
SECONDS/DIV

;Ls

est4ps

.

I

entre

commutateur

le

la

de

du

pdriode

en

MENEM

M

MO

EMMEM

.

MEMEME

.1

.

t

I

.

les

points10%

SECONDS/

pour

M

M

.

TF187837

la

.

trou-

ADDAPR

1982

French2-1

1



Instructions

Mesures

ments

L'oscilloscopeSC502

tent
surer

te

.

1.ChoisirlapositionACouDCdu

GND-DC

2

.

ALT.En
d'un

visualisation

decemode

3.Positionnerlecommutateur
voie1ou
la

meilleure

4

CH1etle

departdusignal

A

comparer.Utiliser

introduisent

5.Si

tenir

d'utilisation

de

I'intervalle

entre

deuxouplusieurs

cette

differencedetemps,

de

chaque

Placerlacommande

general,laposition

signaldebasse

verticale

.

surlavoie2de

synchronisation

AppliquerlesignaldereferenceAla

.

signalAcomparer

de

des

retards

signaux

les

compte

dans

-SC502

de

permetdemesurerletemps

voie

.

MODE

frequence.Dans

donne

sorte

reference

des

cables

similaires

ont

des

polarites

calcul final

le

temps

evenements

CHOP

plus

pour

AlaprisedeI'entree

doit

entre

deux

separes.Pour

utiliserlaprocedure

commutateur

surlaposition

s'emploie

ce

d'informations

declenchement

de

quilavoie

les

deux

preceder

coaxiauxoudes

pour

opposaes,ilfaudra

.

danslecar

chapitre,lapartie

choisie

voies

prisedeI'entree

celuidusignal

les

liaisons

evdne-

exis-

me-

suivan-

AC-

CHOP

ou

surlechoix

sur

permette

.

CH2.Le

sondes

qui

.

en

la

MENERNMENri
NEEMMUMMEA

Mi-amplitude
(50%)

MENEMMEHE

i~i~~aasiss~~sa~

Fig.2-7.Mesure de

=

(50

ps)

.(4)

La

difference

Voie10&fbrence)

NEEMENERN
ENEEMENNE

*Distance

1

horizontale

temps

entre2impulsions

fts

=

200

temps

de

estde200ps.

Vole 2

TF1878-3

.

6.Regler
nir

une

de

.

7.Regler

nir

une

CONDS/DIV
separes
possible

8.Placer

centrale

Agir

9

.

qualesignaldela
trale

horizontaledureticule

10

.Mesurerladistance

et

celuidela

11

.Multiplierladistance

commande

Example

snit

sur

les

deux

mule

commande

la

representation

les

commander

representation

de

maniireice

par

une

distancedetrois

.

verticalement

horizontale

surlacommandePOSITION

voie2(voir

SECONDS/DIV

supposons

:

position50lisetquiladistance

la

points

soit

VOLTS/DIV

d'environ

stable.Agir

reticule

du

voie1(reference)

quilacomma

quatre

de

quatre

du

declenchement

surlacommande

qui

les

divisionsouplussicela

pointsdemesure

les

(commander

sur

une

separantlesignaldela

Fig.2-7)

.

mesuree

.

divisions

de

maniire

divisions

points

de

POSITION)

(horizontale)

rencontre

ligne

verticale

par

('indicationdela

SECONDS/DIV

nde

mesuree

En

utilisantlafor-

.

obte-

i

d'amplitu-

pour

obte-

SE-

mesure

la

soient

surlaligne

pour

ligne

cen-

.

voie

entre

est

.

1

,Mesures

gnauxdemime

trees

dephasage

systeme
procedure

la

ALT.En
basses
tions
sentations

voie1ou
un

etlesignalicomparerila
ou
presenter
reference

de

dephasage

comparaisondela

La

frequence

des

deux

voies

peut

etre

vertical.Pour

.

1.Placer

mime

2.Placerlacommande

3.Positionner
declenchement

4.Appliquerlesignaldereference

les

les

commander

positionACouDC.

general,lemode

et le

mode

ALT

plus

completes

verticales»,

surlavoie2de

sondes

utilises

des

temps

doit

preceder,

entre

phase

peut

verticales

jusqu'ilafrequence

utilisee

effectuerlacomparaison,

AC-GND-DC

MODE

CHOP

aux

frequences

sont

donnees

dans

ce chapitre

commutateurdedeclenchement

le

sorte

et

stable

correct

prise

vehicular

pour

transmission

de

en

temps,lesignal

plusieurs

deuxouplusieurs

entre

faiteenutilisant

etre

Cette

methodedemesure

.

surlaposition

est

utilise

elevees

dansleparagraphe

.

quilavoie

des

deux

ilaprise

d'entree

les

deux

identiques.Le

traces

limite

suivre

des

deux

CHOP

aux

frequences

Des

.

choisie

voies

d'entree

CH2.Les

signaux

comparer

i9

si-

les

en-

de

du

cette

voies

sur

ou

informa-

uRepre-

sur

permette

.

CH1

cables

doivent

signal

.

la

de

Intervalle=Indication

de

tempsSECONDS/DIV

French

2-1

2

enx

Distance horizontale
(divisions)

les

5.Si

dephasage de

signaux

ont

180°,lecalcul

des

polarites
final

opposaes dues i un

tenir

doit

en

compte

ADD

APR

.

1982









6.Agir
sur
presentation

7

tion

qualareprlssentation

8.Centrerlarepresentation
commander

9.Tournerlacommande
jusqu'e ce
exactement8divisions
entreladeuxieme
Chaque
sions
etablieendegres

sur

les

commandes

les

commander

.

Raglerledaclenchement

stable.Choisir

qu'un

divisiondureticule

=

/division.L'echelle

45

°

CAL

soit

identiqueetagaleAenviron5divisions

une

POSITION

cycledusignaldereference

etladixieme

comma

Voie

1

006rence)

soit

CH1etCH2

pour

qua

I'amplitudedechaque

pour

position

CH1etCH2

sur

SECONDS/DIV

d'environuncycledusignal

surlereticuleAI'aide

variable

I'axe

horizontal

ligne

represente

horizontale

par

exemple45°

Voie 2

(en

retard)

VOLTS/D

obtenir

.

une

CAL

SECONDS/DIV

(voie

(voir

verticaledureticule

45

°

(360°=8

peut

/division

IV

.

representa-

de

maniere

.

des

1)

occupe

Fig

.

2-8)

divi-

donct

titre

.

et
re-

.
.

Mesures

avec
changerlaposition
detemps).L'un
ser

valeur
figure

fois.Siladifference

est

Dephasage

de phase de haute

Des

mesuresdephase

deux

traces

en

variabledela

des

I'expanseurdebalayage

Example

.

:

si

I'achelle

d'une

division

2-9 representelesignaldela

Distance

=

horizontale

(divisions)

=

(6)

(4,5

Voie

0iif6rence)

MWMMMMEZMM
MUMMEMENIME

Instructions

d'utilisation

r6solution

plus

pracises

augmentantlavitessedebalayage

moyens

est

horizontale

1

les

(X10)

horizontale

(45°/division)-10=4,5°/div.La

X

°)=

27°

peuvent

commande

plus

simples

.

est

figure

est6divisions,ledephasage

Echelle
expansee
(degres/division)

horizontale

Voie

titre

CAL

consisteiiutili-

expansae

2-8

dix

expanse

2

delabase

-SC502

effectuaes

(sans

fois,

la

10

"

' .

.

1"s--

Fig.2-8.Mesureded6phasage

10

.Mesurerladistance

correspondents

11

.Multiplierladistance

pourexprimerledephasage

Example:supposons

0,6

division

le

montrelafigure

Dephasage

sur

les

signaux

avec

une

echelle

2-8,enutilisantlaformule

Distance

=

horizontaleXhorizontale
(divisions)

"

MB

8

Divisions

(38G°)

.

horizontale

.

(en

divisions)

.

qualadistance

horizontale

Echelle

(degres/division)

""

'i

entre

deux

par45°

horizontale

de45°/d

TF1878-4

points

/division

soit

iv

comma

&A'"

"""

MUMMIMMIMME

1
I

Fig.2-9.Mesure de

delavitesse

Des

broches

de

re (liaisonSC502/TM

lisee

(voirlechapitre5).Unou

chassis

d'alimentation

ge.Ce

cablage

La

positiondecheque
oomposants.Consulterlemanual
pour

plus

dbphasage

de

belayage

.

INTERFACE

libres

sont disponibles surleconnecteur

est

protege

d'informations

500)en

TM

detrompeur

Nw

Distance
horizontale

de

haute

ARRIERE

vue

plusieurs

500

peuvent

par des

.

f

r6solution

dune

application

compartiments

titre

detrompeurs

code

('utilisation

du

chassis

TF1878-5

per

augmentation

specia-

reunis

par

cabla-

de

plastique

des

d'alimentation

arrii

d'un

;-

.

ADD

Le

dephasage

APR

=

1982

(0,6)

est27°

(45)=27°

French

2-13

Das

Zweikanaloszilloskop
loskop
for

sorgungsmodulen
mit

P6060
wAhlbaren

arbeitet
Installation

bereit.Das
installiert

Position
prOfen

piatte

mit

Betriebinzwei

den
demSC

empfohlen.Der

Teiler

mit

Lieferung

Bei

.

Stellen

ALT,umdas

Sie,

leuchtet

einer

Bandbreite

werden

502

dem

Oszilloskop

ob

die

.

EINFOHRUNG

SC

EinschubfAchern

der

SerieTM500

die

Tastkopf

von 1X

ist

and

Teiler

10X

der

SC

wird

Sie

den

Gerdt

Anzeigelampe

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

502

ist

ein

Vielzweckoszil-

von15MHz

Tastkbpfe

10X

ausgestattet;der

.

kalibriert

502

entsprechend

Wahlschalter

mit

Stromzu

and

von

.

Fur

die

P6105,

P6062B

POWER

ist

MODE

versorgen.Ober-

an

eignet

sich

Stromver-

Verwendung

P6062B

and

and

mit

einem

P6105

einsatz-

Abb.2-1

auf die

der

Front-

Schalten
sorgungseinheit
schieben

Einschubs

GRUNDBESCHREIBUNG

Im

folgenden

Arbeitsweise

der

Frontplatte

Sie

die

Stromversorgung

aus,

bevor

.

Andernfalls

zerst6rt

wird eine

der

Bedienungselemente

gegeben

k6nnen

werden

.

Kapitel

den

Sie

die

Schaltkreise

.

DER

kurze

Grundbeschreibung

2 -SC502

der Stromver-

Einschub

ein-

des

BEDIENUNG

Anschlusse

and

der

SPERRE

UNTERE

FOHRUNGS-

SCHIENE

Abb.2-1.Installation

and

Auswechseln

SCHLITZ

.

013ERE

FOHRUNGS-

SCHIENE

TG(2028)1878-02A

ADD

APR

1982

German

2- 1

Bedienungsanleitung-SC

502

BEACHTE!

Die

hellschattierten

dem,

hinter
SECONDS/DIV

einstellungen

.

Die

kung
Knopfkragen von
Empfindlichkeit,

wird.Der

Knopf

gestellte

dehnung

rungen

nen

lediglich

ners.Die

schen Anschlage

Einstellinformationen

1.Stellen

OFF

Schalten

VersorgungseinheitTM500
SC

502inein

die

Stromversorgungsquelle

quenzerfordernissen
den

Stromversorgungsschalter

ein

.

2.Stellen

wie

folgt

ein

INTENSITY

FOCUS
MODE
POSITION

CH

1

CH

2

1

VOLTS/DIV

CH

Variable

AC-GND-DC

CH

1

VOLTS/DIV

CH

2

Variable
CH2AC-GND-DC
POSITION
SECONDS/DIV
CAL/SWP/MAG

SINGL

TRIGGERING

SLOPE
LEVEL
SOURCE

COUPL

Knopfkragen von

dunkelschattierten

farblich

von

SECONDS/DIV

Zeitablenkgeschwindigkeit,

SWP

and

die zusatzlich

zur

Kndpfe

Sie

den

Sie

Einschubfach.Vergewissern

Sie

:

(Horizontal)

SWP

Bereiche

kennzeichnen

Empfindlichkeit

fur

VOLTS/DIV

wenn

ein

schattierte

MAG

eingeschaltet

besseren

d0rfen

eingestellt

Schalter

Stromversorgungsschalter

den

entspricht.Danach

die

Bedienungselemente

auf

der

Frontplatte

VOLTS/DIV

gewahlten

die

and

Zeitablen-

Bereiche

kennzeichnen

10X-Tastknopf

Bereich

kennzeichnet

aufgedruckten

Orientierung

nicht

hinter

werden

MODE

aus and

den Spannungs-and

der

Linksanschlag
Bleibt

CH

1

Mittelbereich

Mittelbereich
.2
Rechtsanschlag

DC
.2
Rechtsanschlag
DC
Mittelbereich
5m
Rechtsanschlag
gedriickt
Aus

Mittelbereich

1

CH
AUTO

hinter

verwendet

hinter

wenn

ist.Die

desSC502

Versorgungseinheit

(Taste

Schattie-

Werte

des

ihre

mechani-

.

installieren

Sie

schalten

des

gelbst)

Grund-

dem,

dem

die
die

Zeit-

Bedie-

auf

Sie

sich,

SC

and

and

die

ein-

die-

PWR

der
den
dad

Fre-

Sie

502

4

.

Verbinden

einesX1Tastkopfes oder
gangsbuchse

5.Stellen

Lageregler
vertikal
starlet

Ablenkstrahl

den
leren

llberpriifung

halb

das

betragen
zontal

Trigger

Triggersignal

gersignals
punkt

Eingang

Rechtecksignal
an

zeigersinn,
len

mente
Rechtecksignals

desSC502.Weitere
der

nungsinformationen"

zentriert

.

6.Stellen

7.Entfernen Sie
Ablenkstrahl

Horizontallinie

8.Verschieben

der

Mittellinie

Kalibratorsignalandie

9.Die

dargestellt

View

10.DrUcken

.

11.SchlieBen

dem

r0ckwsrtigen

12.Drehen
and

hellen

entsprechen

Hiermit

Bedienung

Sie die

CH1.

Sie mil

(POSITION)

Amplitude

andessollten5komplette

auf

fiir

bis

endet

Hilfe

die

ist

andander

mil

Sie
fur

betrachtenzuk6nnen.Der

der

exteme

Sie

Hilfe

die

gesamte

das

vertikalsoein,

des

der

Kalibrierung

Sie

den

des

Rasters

der

werden

Sie

die

horizontalen

Helligkeitsmodulation

Sie

ein 5V,1

an

Pin

24A

Interface

jetzt

INTENSITY

der

Ablenkstrahl

Segmenten

den

.

die

Grundbeschreibung

Einzelheitenzuden

finden

.

BEDIENUNGSELEMENTE

ANSCHLIJSSE

FOCUS-BildschArfe
BildschArfe

des

Ausgangsbuchse

Leiterklemmen

vertikalen

der

Darstellungsoein,

linken

Seite

von

FOCUS

Strahiltinge

Eingangssignal

daBersich

Rasters

Darstellung

.

Taste

Signald9chern

Sie

Schreibstrahls

befindet

Ablenkstrahl

and

schlie6en

Eingangsbuchse

solite3Rasterteile

Signalzyklen

TRIGGER

Mittellinie

kHz-Sinussignal

(externer

erscheint.Die

unterAllgemeine

.

Z-Achseneingang)

-Stecker
langsam

als

eine

Regler zur

CAL

mil

Hilfe

mil

der

and

horizontalen

daB

des

Rasters

einen scharfen

ein

.

and

stellen

auf

der

mitt-

.

1,5

Teile

unter-

Sie

wieder

CH1.

hori-

VIEW,

um

Start
ist

.

an

im

Reihe

hellen

des

Sinus-

fur

Funktionen

Trig-

des

derTrigger-

oder

Gegenuhr-

von

dunk-

Seg-

oder

den

Betrieb

Bedie-

UND

Einstellung

.

Ein-

sie

Sie

das

and

der

3

.

Stellen

INTENSITYsoein,

von

gestellt

German

wird

2-2

.

Sie

Helligkeit

die

daB

des

Ablenkstrahis

der

Strahl

gut

mil

sichtbar

Hilfe

dar-

-

INTENSITY
lung

der

tronenstrahlrt5hre

Bildhelligkeit.Regler

Helligkeit

der

.

Darstellung

zur

auf

der

ADDAPR

Einstel-

Elek-

1982



Sedienungsanleitung

502

SC

OSCILLOSCOPE

BW_15M"r

1

.523nS

TRIGGERING

®

SC

502

REV

MAR

1983

(D

Abb.2-2.Bedienungselemente

(D

and

Anschliisse

der

Frontplatte

1878-32

.

German

2-3



SC

Bedienungsonleitung

502

-

TRIGGER

Mit
signal

MODE

ter

tikalen
dazu,

VIEW

Hilfe

dieser

dem

auf

Vertikale

-

gestattet

die

VerstArkersystems

das

Instrument

OFF

PWR
dieser

interne
CH1-

von

CH2­von

ALT
Signals

tung

Position

Stromversorgung

Kanal1.

Kanal

Kanal2.Eserfolgt

Kenal2.

-

Altemierend

beider Kandle,

von

einem
jederZeitablenkung
wird

for

oberhalb1ms/cm

CHOP

Freilaufende

-

spurdarsteliung

Darstellung wird

Die
mit einer

250kHz
for
1

CH
wird

addiert

umgeschaltet.Diese

Zeitablenkgeschwindigkeiten

ms/cm

1

MINUS

verwendet

invertiert

.

-Darstellung
Drucktaste

Bildschirm

Betriebsart.Dieser

Wahl

Stromversorgungsschalter

­des

Es

1

.

Kanal

desTriggersignals

wird

das

sichtbar

gemacht

Wahlschal-

der

Betriebsart

dient

gleichzeitig

auszuschalten

ein-

and

and

Wahlschalters

ausgeschaltet

erfolgt

nur

nur

Zweispurdarstellung

.

wobei

zum

erfolgt.Diese

Darstellung

die

dieDarstellung

die

Umschal-

anderen

Betriebsart

Trigger-

des

ver-

.

ist

.

am

Ende

Zeitablenkungsgeschwindigkeiten

verwendet

.

Umschaltung.Zwei-

den

KanAle

Kandlen

von

etwa

wird

Signale beider

der

zwischen

Folgegeschwindigkeit

Betriebsart

unterhalb

.

CH2.

and

Eingang

Der

algebraisch

von

zu

Kanal

Kenal

.

die

des

die

der

erfolgt

DC

.

ein

zur

Darstel-

BNC-

Trigger-

das

Ver-

AC

Einstel-

des

Um-

mit

die-

.

X

.

AC-GND-DC
WAhlt

die

-

Art, in

Schalter

der

VertikalverstArker

wird

das

AC
vertikalen

Eingangssignal

VerstArker

Gleichspannungskomponente
wird.In

.

In

EingangsverstArker

Aufladung

die

(Precharge-Funktion).In

tors
wird

das

VerstArker

nenten

10

Kalibratorausgang.Diese
positives
Netzfrequenz

Tastkopfkompensation

and
POSITION

horizontalen
lung

.

EXT

TRIG/AMPL
Buchse
signals

der

des

Eingangssignal

gekoppelt,sodaB

zum

EingangsverstArker

Rechtecksignal

zur

Horizontaler

­Einstellung

-

als

dient

Daroberhinaus

.

(horizontal)-Signal

Eingangskopplung(AC-DC)

.

13

stArkersignals

gewAhlt

.

CAL-Variables
Einstellglied

lungen

zwischen

wird

Einstellglied/Zeitdehnung.Des

CAL

Stufenschalters

einer

2

1

stecken
sem

Einstellglied

eingestelit

internen

.

for

Eingangskopplung

Eingangssignalanden

das

gekoppelt

wird.In

der

kapazitivanden

gekoppelt,

wobei

unterdrOckt

Position

GND

wird

geerdet.AuBerdem
Eingangskoppelkondensa-

der

Position

direktanden

alle

vertikalen

Signalkompo-

gelangen

Buchse

von

Kalibrierung

0,6Vmit

VerstArkung

der

liefert

doppelter

.

Lageregler.Regler

Lage

der

der

Eingangsbuchse.Diese

Eingang

an

gestattet
den

SECONDS/DIV

variable

for

externe

im

wird

these

XY-Betrieb

Buchse

des

Ober

die

Triggertaste

stufenlose

kalibrierten

.

Brocke

werden

Triggerholdoffzeiten

gelegt.Die

externen

Stufen

Durch

Position

®

German

2

CH1and

Kenal2.

and
Einstellung

VOLTS/DIV
WAhlt

kalibrierte

Folge1-2-5

CH

DieRegler

der

-

Der

.

POSITION
Lage

Vertikale

variable

Rechtsanschlag

Ablenkkoeffizienten

eines1XTastkopfes

dung
hellschattierten

Verwendung

grauschattierten

CAL-Variables
lose

Einstellung

fen

des

Stufenschalters

Bereichs

eines

Bereich

Einstellglied.Gestattet

zwischen

EingangsanschluB

vertikalen

der

2-

4

Eingangssignale

LagereglerKanal

-

gestatten die

der

Darstellung

Ablenkkoeffizienten

Ablenkkoeffizienten

Einsteller

eingestelit

kalibriert

werden

CALmuB

sein,

sind.Bel

die

abgelesen;bei

10X

Tastkopfes

die

.

den

kalibrierten

VOLTS/DIV

.

BNC-Buchse

zum

.

vertikale

.

in

damit

Verwen-

Werte

Werte

stufen-

.

AnschluB

der

auf

die

des

der

im

Stu-

1

Durch

Ziehen

des

Knopfes
eingeschaltet,d.h.
wirdumX10

14

.

SECONDS/DIV
schalter
Betrieb

zeiten
glied

hellschattierte
kennzeichnet

farbig-schattierte

der
gedehnte

15

TRIG'D
Anzeigelampe

gedehnt

wAhlt

in

der

Position

kalibriert

Rechtsanschlag

auf

Zeitablenkung

READY

-

Zeitablenkung

geeichte

sind,

Bereich

ungedehnte

die

Bereit.Das

-

zeigtinder
maligen Zeitablenkung
kung

bereitgestellt

geeigneten
einmaliger

zeigt
kung

Triggersignals
Zeitablenkung

Anzeigelampe

die
getriggert

ist

.

wird die

die

horizontale

.

Ablenkzeiten

AMPL.Damit

muI3

das

eingestellt

unter

Bereich

.

an,

ist

and

eine Darstellung

an,

Zeitdehnung

Darstellung

.

Dieser

die

variable

Knopfkragen

dem

Zeitablenkung

kennzeichnet

Leuchten

Betriebsart

daB

die

nach

Erhalt

.

erfolgt

daB

Ansonsten

die

ADD

Stufen-

sowie

XY-

Ablenk-

Einstell-

sein.Der

dieser

der

ein-

Zeitablen-

eines

mit

Zeitablen-

1982

APR

;

-

POWER

Anzeigelampe.Das

Anzeigelampe

versorgt

Strom

zeigt

ist

.

an,

daB

Leuchten

der

SC

dieser

502

mit

Bedienungsanleitung

CH2gedruckt-Kanal2.
dasinKanal2zur

Triggerquelle

VerfUgung

verwendet

Ein

.

Tail

steht,

-

des

SC

502

Signals,
wird

als

RESET-Zurucksetzen.Wird
Betriebsart

druckt,
Zeitablenkung
weitere

muB

die

der

einmaligen

erfolgt

die

Darstellung

nach

korrekter

Zeitablenkungen

RESET-Taste

erneut

darstellenzuk6nnen,

Triggerbetriebsarten

-

AUTO

gedruckt

kung

wird
ausgelbst
lduft

helle

AUTO
dieser

durch
Fehlt

helle
SINGL

.

Zeitablenkung

die

Bezugsspur

geldst

Betriebsart

das

ein

geeignetes

Bezugsspur

SWP

kung.Wird

ist

AUTO
der

geldst,

Betriebsart

kung.Nachdem
kung

erfolgt

teren

Zeitablenkungen

RESET

Taste

COUPLING
wAhlen

die

-

Art,

Triggerschaltkreise

AC

Taste
kopplung.Die
tiv

an

die

Gleichspannungen
Signale

schwAcht

unter

.

AC-Taste

kopplung

.

die Triggerschaltkreise
LF

REJ

gedruckt
signale
kreise

werden

gekoppelt.Gleichspannung
unterdruckt,
abgeschwdcht

Automatisch.Die

durch

das

angelegte

Fehlt

ein

geeignetes

.

Normaler

­wird

angelegte

Triggersignal

Triggersignal,

geliefert

gedruckt

these Taste

Einmalige

­gedruckt

arbeitet

der

einmaligen

eine

einmalige

ist,

k6nnensolange

gedruckt

wird

Triggerkopplung.Diese Tasten

mit

der

das

gekoppelt

gedruckt-Wechselspannungs-

Triggersignale

Triggerschaltkreise

werden

etwa 50

geldst
Die

(DC)

- Gleichspannungs-

Triggersignale

gekoppelt

(HochpaB).Die

kapazitivandie

Signale

unter

.

these Tasteinder

Zeitablenkung

der

einmaligen

ge-

Triggerung.Um

gedruckt

werden

Zeitablen-

Triggersignal

Triggersignal,

frei

and

liefert

eine

Triggerbetrieb.In

die

Zeitablenkung

ausgel6st

wird

keine

.

Zeitablen-

and

dieTaste

die

Zeitablenkung

Zeitablen­Zeitablen-

keine

wei-

stattfinden, bis

die

.

Triggersignalandie

wird

.

werden

kapazi-

gekoppelt

unterdruckt

Hz

werden

werden

and

abge-

direkt

.

Trigger-

Triggerschalt-

wird

5 kHz

werden

an

in

.

SLOPE

Wahl
Triggersignals,ander

I6st

.

LEVEL-Pegelregler.WAhlt
punkt
I6sung der Zeitablenkung

BEDIENUNGSINFORMATIONEN

Raster

Der

Bildschirm

Raster
genzuerm6glichen.Das

zehn

mit

.

Helligkeitsregelung

r6hre
SITY
stelit,

der

tig,
wird.Ein

einbrennen
Elektronenstrahlr6hre

ausgestattet,umparallaxefreie,

horizontale

hat

eine

Gr6Be

ist

nochmalinfOnf

and

Zeitbasis

Hilfe

des

Die

Helligkeit

wird

geregelt.Der

daB der

(nicht

zu hoher)

rung

derZeitablenkgeschwindigkeit

regler u.U.nachgeregelt

wenn

nur

Punkt

LINE ­gedruckt).Werden

gleichzeitig
eingeschaltet;ein
als

EXT
externen
sind,

Netz (Beide

Tasten,CH1

die

gedruckt,

Triggersignal

ist

Tell

der

verwendet

gedruckt-Extern.Signale,

Triggereingang

werden

-

der

fur

die

Triggerung

Flankenwahlschalter.Gestattet

positiven

oder

die

wird

.

auf

dem

Triggersignal,andem

ALLGEMEINE

des

Rasterteile

von etwa

Teile

sind so

Rasters

der

Darstellung

mit

Hilfe

des

Regler

Ablenkstrahl

Helligkeit

ein

Punkt

mit

hoher

and

zu

SC

Raster

0,6cmx

markiert.Die

kalibriert,

durchgef0hrt

Bedienungselementes

werden.Seien

auf

einer

f0hren,

ist

502

istinacht

aufgeteilt.Jedes

0,6cm.

daB

auf

wird

normalerweise

gut

sichtbar,

dargestellt

dem

Helligkeit

dauerhaften Zerstbrung

wenn

and

CH

TastenCH1

die

andCH2

Betriebsart

Netzspannung

.

die

an den

angeschlossen

(12)

verwendet

negativen
Zeitablenkung

den

Amplituden-

Flanke

ausge-

die

erfolgt

.

mit

einem

genaue

internen

Ablesun-

vertikale

Rasterteil

Jedes

Rasterteil

VertikalverstArkung

genaue

werden

der

Messungen

k6nnen

Elektronenstrahl-

INTEN-

einge-

so

mit

ausreichen-

wird

.

Bei

Ande-

muB

der

Helligkeits-

Sie

bitte

vorsich-

Bildschirm

kann

dies

dargestellt

den

Phosphor

(Anger

auftritt

2,

LINE

wird

.

die

des

Aus-

and

.

der

.

ADD

SOURCE
die

Triggerquelle

1

CH
dasinKanal1zur

Triggerquelle

APR

1982

-

Triggerquelle.Diese

.

gedruckt-Kanal1.

Verf0gung

verwendet

.

Ein

Tasten

Teil

steht,

des

wAhlen

Signals,

wird

als

BildschArfe

Hilfe

des

Solite mit

scharfe
sondere
matismus

Darstellung

bei

geringer

justiert

Reglers

eingestellt

Helligkeit),

werden.Dies

Servicepersonal durchgefOhrt

FOCUS

keine

werden k6nnen

muB

intern

sollte

nurvon

werden

.

gen0gend

(insbe-

der

Astig-

geschultem

German

2-

5

Sedienungsanieitung-SC

502

Zur

Oberprufung

FOCUS
Signal

matismus

langsam

auf

dem

korrekt

horizontalen
FOCUS-Einstel

Ausrichtung

Die

Strahlspur

richtet

werden.Diese

tem

Servicepersonal

Teile

der

des

durch

den

Bildschirm

eingestellt,

des

Signals

lung

schArfsten

am

Strahispur

kann

intern

Justage

durchgefuhrt

Helligkeitsmodulation
AnschluB

Mit
eine
der

Koordinaten
dargestellten

tionssignal
tigen
Helligkeit

fur

die

von

Pin

24A

Hilfe

der

dritte

GrOBe

vertikalen

igkeitsmodulation

Hell

auf die

(Y-Achse)

bezogen

Signals

fur

die

Z-Achse

Interface-Steckers

dargestellten

des

Modulation

benutzten

werden,

beeintrAchtigt

Helligkeitseinstellungab.
erzeugt

and
Signale

Die
Frequenzbereich

0

den

normalen

ein

Signal

zwischen+5Vand

max.zuldssige

bis2MHz

.

Helligkeitspegel

von -5V

Eingangsspannung

fair

die

Kalibrator

interne

Der
quelle

fur

basis.Ebenso
sation

von

Ausgangsspannung

keit

von1%.Die

doppelte

Kalibrator

die

Uberprufung

wird

das

Tastkopfen

betrdgt

Frequenz des

Netzfrequenz

verwendet.Die

.

Vertikaldarstellungen

Einkanaldarstellung.Jedes

Einkanaldarstellung

zur
Signal

Triggersignal

an den

den

MODE-Schalter

gewunschten

gerquellenschalter

wAhlen

auf

SOURCE

.

Astigmatismus

drehen

Optimumbereich, wobei

dargestellt

werden

bei

ein

dargestellt

parallel

sollte

zum
nur

werden

wird.Ist
die

der

vertikalen

and

derselben
.

Raster

von

qualifizier-

.

(nurinVerbindung

des

Interface-Steckers)

(Z-Achse)

zweidimensionale

and

horizontalen

ohne

daB

Darstellung

(X-Achse)

Form

die

wird.Das

wirdanPin

angeschlossen

Signals.Die

Eine

schaltet

24A

Signals

Spannung

die

des

Andert

and
Amplitude

hAngt

von+5

der

Darstellung

Helligkeit

- 5Verzeugen Grauwerte
betrAgt±10V;

Z-Achsen-Schaitkreise

des

SC

502

dient

als

VerstArkung

der

Kalibratorsignal

and

zur

rechteckf6rmige

600

mV

be!

einer

Rechtecksignals

der

Eingangssignale

benutzt

den

werden.Legen

Eingang
benutzten

kann

jeden

and

schalten

Kanal.Der

Vertikalkanal

Sie

ein

Astig-

and

ausge-

mit

dem

kann

des

Modula-

ruckwAr-

die

des

von

der

aus

der

betrAgt

Signal-

der

Zeit-

Kompen­Genauig-

ist

die

kann

Sie

das

Sie

Trig-

als

In

der

werden
Liegt

zwischen

wird

eines

Zweikanalbetrieb

Schalterstellung
stellung,

schaltet
Darstellungen

samer

gestellt
die

Umschaltung

beeinflussen

einem

Mit

zu

einem

Betrieb
den

gleichen

oder

Kanal2.

V

.
.

Zwei

mit

den

Liegt

kein

dargestellt

Algebraische

des

MODE-Schalters

zwischen

von

kung
fur

DC-Offsets

eine

Gleichspannung

anteil

des

Die

folgenden

werden

1.uberschreiten

nung

des

Legen

2

.

Ablenkkoeffizienten

uberschreiten

Schalter

dieses

k6nnten

gen

PositionCH1

Signaleinrichtiger Zeitrelation

zwei

von

die

zwischen

wird.Die

oder

wenn

werden

and

CH2des

den

beiden

beiden

Signalen

Signalen

(zerhackte

MODE-Schalters

des

beiden

CHOP-Betriebsart

bei

Ablenkzeiten

einmalige

sollen.Bel

schnelleren

sichtbar

Darstellung).Die

Signalen

von 50

Ereignisse zweikanalig

and

.

externen

der

Eingangssignale

Triggerergebnisse.Diese

gute

Erfolg

zeitbezogene

echten

Zeitbezug

Triggersignal,

hat,

wie

die

interne

Signale

k6nnenimCHOP-Betrieb

ZeitverhAltnissen

vor,

wird

ein

.

Addition.Die

kann

zwei

Signalen

unerwunschten

(an

den

StellungCH1

zur

oder

Signalen

Eingang

Darstellung

zur

gelegt,umden Gleichspannungs-

anderen

Signals

kompensieren)

zu

VorsichtsmaBnahmen

:

Sie

nicht

die

SC

502

.

Sie

keine

Signale

an,

(VOLTS/DIV)ummehr

.

Wenn

beispielsweise

ein

Wertvon

Kanals3V

die

0,5

eingestellt

uberschreiten.H6here

nicht

Darstellung

verzerren

SOURCE-Schalters

dargestellt

kein

Zeitbezug

instabil

dargestellt

CHOP-

erzeugt

eine

elektronisch

erzeugt

ms/Teil

die

and

besten

Ablenkzeiten

kann

die

Darstellung

das

einen

Zeitbezug

erzielt

manimCHOP-

Betriebsart

Triggerung

dargestellt

Signal

shindig

Kanal

auf

werden

instabil

minus

der

Differenz

Gleichtaktunterdruk-

einen

werden

Kanals

benutzt

des

.

sollten

beachtet

Eingangsnennspan-

den

mit

ist,

eingestellten

als

Faktor

VOLTS/DIV-

dem
sollte

das

Signal

die

Spannun-

.

vor,

.

Dar-

ge-

lang-

dar-

wird

hat

CH

2

oder

wird

.

1

.

6

Zweikanaldarstellung
Position
lung

ALT

des

mit

alternierender

MODE-Schalters

Kanglen1and2,jeweils
abgelenkt

Ablenkzeiten

Betriebsart
eine

German

wurde.Obwohl

benutzt

bei

Ablenkzeiten

zufriedenstellendere

2-6

(alternierender

Umschaltung

nachdem

werden

der

die

ALT-Betriebsart

kann,

von 50

Darstellung

erzeugt

zwischen den

Strahl
erzeugt

Ns/Teil
.

Betrieb).Die

eine

Darstel-

uber

die

CRT

alien

bei

die

CHOP-

and

(Anger

3.Benutzen

Kanal2um

die

Sie

die

Signale,
werden,inSchirmmitte
garantiert

1

MINUS

CH

4.Um

leisten,
KanAle

den

CH2.

gleiches

stellen

die

in

grOBten

Verhalten

Sie

gleiche

den

Stellung

Lageeinsteller

wenn

these

von

einzeln

zu schieben.Diese

Dynamikbereichinder

beider

Schalter

Kandle

DC-GND-AC

.

ADD

Kanal1and

dargestellt

MaBnahme
Betriebsart

zu

gewAhr-

beider

APR

1982

Ablenkkoefzienten

Der

Betrag der

Signalamplitude,
DIV

and

durch

die

die

Stellung
VOLTS/DIV-Schalters
koeffizienten,

zeigt

werden,

stellunginder
schlag)

Die

.

variable

lichkeit,

den

kalibrierten

variieren.Die
tet

den

einem

Wert von 50

ZuverlAssige

werden,

einer

gemeinsamen
Signalleitung
am

Tastkopf

gemeinsame

tung

auch

werden

.

die

von

sind

nur

kalibrierten

Einstellung

den

Ablenkkoeffizienten

Stufen

variable Einstellung

gr6Bten

vertikalen

V/Teil

Messungen

wenn

das

angeschlossen

bietet

die

Massezugewdhrleisten,

mit

dem

Chassis

Vertikalablenkung

Einstellung

bestimmt.Die

dem

dann

des

der

variablen

kalibrierten

VOLTS/DIV-Schalter

gultig,

wenn

Stellung

von

VOLTS/DIV

kontinuierlich

VOLTS/DIV-Schalters

des

VOLTS/DIV

Ablenkkoeffizienten

.

kOnnen

Oszilloskop

Bezugsleitung

and

(Masse)

sind.Der

beste

Masseverbindung.Um

des McBobjektes

wird

durch

Schalters

VOLTS/-

Einstellung

die

variable Ein-

steht

(Rechtsan-

bietet

die

zwischen

Oberschrei-

nur

durchgef0hrt

McBobjekt an

das

andander

MasseanschluB

muB

die

Masselei-

verbunden

die

des

Ablenk-

ange-

M6g-

zu

bis

zu

eine

In

der

GND-Position

nen1MO-Widerstand,

pelkapazitdt
Masse

KoppelkapazitAt
Signals

GND-DC-Schalters
vorgerufene

ein

Ladungsnetzwerk

gelegt.Ober

auf

aufgeladen.Da

transiente

dieses
den

statfindet,

VerstArker-Eingang
bietet

auBerdem

lastungen
der

EingangskapazitAt

tung

sollte

eine Signalquelle
anteil

unterschiedlich

legten Signal

1.Bevor

schlossen
GND

.

2.BerQhren

einen

vom

McBobjekt,

beachtet

werden,

gelegt

.

die

Signalquelleandie

wird,

stellen

Sie

mit
kopchassis.Warten
gangskoppelkapazitAt

3.Verbinden

quelle

.

Sie

Bedienungsanleitung-SC

wird

das

Eingangssignal

derinVerbindung

mit

(precharge)

Netzwerk

Signalmittelwert

diesinder

werden

Spitzenspannungen

gelangen.Das

Schutz

der

flieBen

wenn

wird

GND-Position

versehentlich

Ladungsnetzwerk

gegen

starke

wAhrend

kann.Die

die

Tastkopfspitze

die

des

angelegten

nichtanden

Aufladung

der

folgende

wird, dieimGleichspannungs-

ist

gegenObereinem

vorher

Tastkopfspitze

Sie

den

SchalterAC-GND-DC

der

Tastkopfspitze

Sie einige

entladen

die

Tastkopfspitze

Sekunden,
ist

.

mit

das

bis

der

502

Ober

ei-

der

Kop-

bildet,

auf

Eingangs-

des

AC-

her-

Strombe-

Anlei-

an

ange-

ange-

auf

Oszillos-

die

Ein-

Signal-

Eingangskopplung

Der

AC-GND-DC-Schalter
plungsmethoden
Kopplungsarthi;ngt

der

gewOnschten

Bei

der

AC-Kopplung

des

Signals

abgeblockt.Die
liegt

bei

der

niedrigen

FrequenzenimBereich

SignaldAmpfungen
mit

Niederfrequenzanteilen

fung

in

derSignalform

die

besten

spannungsanteil

for

das

von

Darstellungab.

durch

eine

untere

AC-Kopplung

gerechnet

Darstellungen

haben, der

Wechselspannungsanteil

Die

DC-Kopplung

benutzt

gen

werden.Diese

von

Signalen

Frequenzen<50

die

durch

die

In

der

GND-Position

Eingang
Masse

vom
1

gelegt,

geerdet

Eingangskreis

Mfg-Widerstand

kann

mit

Gleichspannungsanteilen

Hz,

zur

AC-Kopplung

ohne

daB

wird.Das

abgetrennt

auf

erlaubt

angelegte

dem

wird

der

KapazitAtimEingangsschaltkreis

Frequenzgrenze(-3

beica.10Hz.Dadurch

werden

beeinfluBt.DieAC-Kopplung

von

wesentlich

.

fOr

die

Kopplungsart

Vermeidung

hervorgerufen

wird

eine

der

angelegte

Massepotential

gangsverstArker-Schaltkreis
gehalten

.

verschiedene

Signal.Die

angelegten

Signal

Kop-

gewAhlte

and

Gleichspannungsanteil

dB-Punkt)

muB

der

Grenzfrequenz

werden.Rechtecksignale

durch these

DAmp-

bietet

Signalen,

die

grOBer

meisten

erm6glicht

einen

Gleich-

ist

als

Anwendungen

Messun-

and

von

DAmpfungen,

werden

.

Massereferenzanden

Tastkopf

wird

and

Ober

eine

Signal

dieser

wird

Ober

gelegt.Der

auf

Massepotential

externe

intern
einen

Ein-

von

bei
mit

der

mit

4.Warten

Sie

koppelkapazitdt

5.Stellen

Darstellung
komponenten

Sie

ist

auf

einige

geladen

den

zur

Sekunden,
ist

.

AC-GND-DC-Schalter

Messung

dem

Bildschirm

der

Triggerquelle

Inteme

kann

PositionenCH1
wird
system

spezielle

rekte

Beziehen

kanalbetrieb.In

Triggerung.Bei

die

Zeitablenkung

das

Triggersignal

abgeleitet

Betrachtungen

and

FOrZweikanal-Darstellungen

.

CH

den

intern

des

2

aus
gemacht

Darstellungzuerzielen

Sie

sich

auf die

dem

Tell

Ober

meisten

getriggert

Triggerquellen-Schalters

dem

.

Erkliirungen

Vertikaldarstellungen

allgemeinen Bedienungsanleitung
Triggerung

Netztriggerung.Die

schalters
CH1andCH2

Teil

der
gergenerator
nOtzlich,

Netzfrequenz
stellung

benutzt

beschrieben

wird

durch

eingeschaltet.In

Netzspannung

benutzt.Die

wenn

das

Eingangssignal

hat.Es

von

komplexen

werden

.

.

LINE-Position

gleichzeitiges

der

als

Eingangssignal

Netztriggerung

kann

auBerdem

netzfrequenten

bis

die

Eingangs-

aufDC.

Die

Wechselspannungs-

.

Anwendungen

.

werden

In

den

Vertikalablenkungs-

mOssen

werden,umeine

fOr

den

kor-

Zwei-

der

die

ist

des

drOcken

LINE-Position

einen

Zweikanal-

Triggerquellen-

der Tasten

wird

fOr

den

Trig-

ist

besonders

Zeitbezug

zur

stabilen

Dar-

zur

Signalen

ein

ADD

APR

1982

German

2-

7

Bedienungsanleitung

SC

502

-

Exteme

EXT
benutzt

Position
len,

dargestellten
Ein

rung
Signal

teile

Triggerung.Ein

externes

IN-Buchse angeschlossen

werden,

EXT

muB

das

externes

benutzt

eine zu

enthtklt,

wenn

der

steht.Um

externe

Signal

eine

Triggersignal

haben

Triggersignal

denen

wenn

Amplitude

nicht

werden,

geringe

auf

Triggerquellenschalterinder

.

kann dann

ist,

stabile

beispielsweise

aufweist

getriggert

SignaltrennungeninVerstArkern,

.

ist

die

Signalformstufen
falls

von

Vorteil.Von
obiekts
kopf

werden.Die
gleiche

kann

mit

dem

Zeitablenkung

Signal

das

externen

getriggert

unterschiedlichen
Signal
der

ohne
MUB

sowohl

Zeitrelation

daB

.

Amplitudendnderungen,

oder

die Triggereinstellung

usw

einem

Signal

Punkteninder

der

externe

Schaltungspunkt

ein

fiber

Kabel

Trigger-Eingang

wird

dann

erlaubt

and

Schaltung,

Signalform

Triggerkopplung

Mit

dem

Triggerkopplungsschalter

verschiedene

ermoglicht

art

bestimmten

selektive

AC-Kopplung.In

spannungsanteile
nale

mit

gedampft.Im
meisten

gersignal
mit

dem

stellung

Niederfrequenzunterdriickung

LF

REJ

kHz

passieren.Gleichspannung

5
Signale
gerung von

Betriebsart
quenzanteilen

Kopplungsarten

die

Bevorzugung

Frequenzen

des

Triggerungzuerzielen

AC-Position

der

des

Triggersignals

niederfrequenten

allgemeinen

Anwendungen

unerwunschte

SchalterLFREJ

erzielt

werden

I9Bt alle

hochfrequenten

Anteilen
kann

benutzt

Frequenzkomponenten,
COUPLING

.

unterhalb5kHzwerden

komplexen

fur die

Signalformen

stabilen

Darstellungen

.

wAhlen.Jede

oderUnterdruckung

Triggersignals,umeine

.

die

werden

.

Frequenzanteile

geddmpft

Triggerflanke

DerTriggerflanken-Schalter

Triggerkreis
ausgel6st

gend)

steigenden

auf

wird.Wenn

Stellung

Signalanteil.Sindinder
Wiederholungen,
ters

oft

nicht

gungsausschnitt
stellung
lungander

beginnt

des

SLOPE-Schalters

gewunschten

.

steigenden

dem

der

steht,

startet

ist

die

wichtig.Soll

dargestellt

(SLOPE)

oderfallenden

SLOPE-Schalter

die

Zeitablenkung

Einstellung

allerdings

werden,

wichtig,

Flanke

Signal,

kann

zur

an

das

die

Triggerung

Darstellungzuerzie-

einen

Zeitbezug

zur

Signaltrigge-

das

oder

werden

zum

interne

Signalan-

soll.Bei

Phasennetzwerken,

Triggerung

oder

des

einen

eben-

MeB­Tast-

verbunden

durch das

immer

die

Messung

wobei

Anderungen

aufweisen

nachgestellt

lassen

sich

an

das

in

kann,

werden

zwei

Kopplungs-

von

werden

die

Gleich-

abgeblockt.Sig­unter50Hz
AC-Kopplung

.

EnthdIt

werden

fur

das

die

Trig-

kann

eine

bessere

Schalterstellung

Die

Dar-

fiber

der

sich

these

Hochfre-

and

Trig-

wird

unterdruckt

eignet

Bei

.
von

bestimmt,obder

Signalteil

in

der+

(stei-

mit

dem

Darstellung

des

nur

die

ist

damit

des

Eingangssignals

mehrere

SLOPE-Schal-

Schwin-

ein

richtige

die

Ein-

Darstel-

Triggerpegel

Triggerpegeleinstellung

Die

Amplitudenpunkt

kung

getriggert

Regler
gieren,

hat.Ist

im

sobald

der

Triggerkreis
Triggersignals

Triggerpegel

quelle

SOURCE,

Triggerflanke

Danach
and

stellung

stellen

drehen

an

auf

dem

Signal,

werden

positiven

das

soll.Befindet sich

Bereich,

Triggersignal

Pegelreglerimnegativen

reagieren,

in

eingestellt

SLOPE

Sie

ihnimGegenuhrzeigersinn,

Sie

dem

gewunschten

sobald

negativer

wird, sollten

die

Kopplungsart

gewAhlt

den

Pegelregler

Richtung

Triggerbetriebsart

Automatische

Taste

gedruckt)

bei

richtig

dem

Triggersignal

lampe

READY

rator

getriggert

Ist

die

Wiederholfrequenz

ist

oder
lAuft

eine
signal

kein

derAblenkzeitgeneratorfrei,umauf

helle

angeschlossen,
beentet
Signaldarstellung

stellung)

.

Normale

(Drucktaste
gersignal
dings

kein

zeitgenerator
Die

READY

Benutzen

holfrequenzen
Betriebsart

signals

and
lungen,dabei
lung

erfolgt.Be!

zeigelampe

Trigger-Holdoff.Durch

kers

HO-SWP

lenkung

(CAL)

urnfunktioniert.In
variablen Trigger-Holdoff

odischen
Digitalworten,

nur

von

qualifiziertem

Triggerung.Die

des

Triggerbetriebsartenschalters

eingestelltem

TRIG'D

ist

.

eine

stabile

zeigt

Triggerpegel

an,

ausreichendes

Bezugsspur

erzeugen.Wird

zu

wird

and

der

Ablenkzeitgenerator

getriggert

Triggerung.Der

AUTO

gel6st)

anliegt,

dem

Triggersignal

nicht

andeserfolgt

entspricht,

automatischen

vorhanden,

TRIG'D-Anzeigelampe

zur

unter

eine

Triggerung

20Hz

die

Anzeigedes

Sie

bietet

einer Korrektur

Fehlen

TRIG'D

eines

korrekter

.

Triggersignals
Triggerung

Umschalten

in

die

StellungHOwird

zur

variablen

dieser

Konfiguration
stabile

oder

unregelmABigen

werden

erzielt

Personal

LEVEL

bei

wird

steigende

sich

werden

bestimmt den

dem

die

Zeitablen-

der

der

Triggerkreis rea-

Amplituden

Bereich,

Amplitude

die

Andert.Bevor

zuerst die

COUPLING

.

LEVEL-

wird

der

des

der

Trigger-

and

die

an Rechtsanschlag

bis

die

Dar-

Punkt

beginnt

AUTO-Stellung

.

(AUTO-

bietet

and

ausreichen-

.

Die

Triggerung

dab

der Ablenkzeitgene-

des

Triggersignals<20

Triggersignal

der

freilaufente

(mit

der

richtigen

normale

solange

Betrieb;ist

arbeitet

keine

Strahlablenkung

bleibt

von

Signalen

normale

Betriebsart.Diese

vorhandenen

der

Triggerkontroll-Einstel-

leuchtet

des

die

Anzeige-

Hz

vorhanden,

dem

Bildschirm

ein

Trigger-

Zustand

zur

stabilen

Pegelein-

Triggerbetrieb

ein Trig-

aller-

Ablenk-

der

.

dunkel

mit

Wieder­Trigger-

keine

Darstel-

die

An-

internen

variable

Stek-

Zeitab-

.

Trigger-Holdoff-Einstellung

Triggerungen

Signalen,

(Der

interne

umgesteckt

k6nnen

komplexen

wie

Stecker

werden)

mit

auf

dem

aperi-

sollte

.

German2-8

ADD

APR

1982

Die

Benutzung

mt5gliche

and

Triggereinstellelementen
Danach

drehen

Holdoff-Einstellung

der

stabilste

Darstellung

auf

Sie

den

variablen

normale

Einsteller
ger-HoldoffimGegenuhrzeigersinn,
benen

InstabilitAten

Einmalige

nicht

repetierend

oder

Zeit Andert,

instabiles

Ablenkung"

Die

einmalige

Ablenkung

Oszillogramm

(single

nichtrepetierenden

verschwunden

ist

oder

erzeugt

sweep)

Ablenkung

Signals benutzt

Wenn

.

sichinder

die

.Inder

kann

kann

das

normale

Betriebsart

dies

auch

setzt

die

Weise

alle

.

die mit

m6glich

fur

den

0briggeblie-

voraus,

bis

sind

dargestellte

Amplitude,

Darstellung

einmalige



vermieden

werden

zur Fotografie
werden

.

best-

den

ist

Trig-

Signal

Form

ein

eines

Wenn

der

Ablenkzeit

.

CONDS/DIV-Schalters
spielsweise

die

gedehnte Ablenkung

XY-Betrieb

Bei

einigen

Signal

gegen

genOber
SECONDS/DIV-Schalters

.

externes
dadurch

der

Signalanden
eine

Sedienungsanleitung

SWP

Schalter

durch

der

SECONDS/DIV-Schalter

Anwendungen

ein

anderes

internen

MAG

Teilung

der

durch

0,05

darzustellen

Zeitbasis.Die

bietet

eingeschaltet

Einstellung

10

bestimmt.Wenn

Ns/Teil

isteswOnschenswert,

die M6glichkeit,

Horizontalverstdrkerzu

XY-Darstellungzuerhalten

-

SC

wird

ist,

des

auf.5N

steht,

.

(XY)

and

nicht

AMP-Stellung

legen

.

502

die

SE-

bei-

ist

ein

ge-

des

ein

and

Die

Benutzung

daa der

Triggerkreis
anspricht.Lbsen
and

stellen

Sie

ger-Einstellung

erfolgen,

Signal
statistisch

drOcken
I0sen

I6st
erscheint

komplett

seiner

leuchtet,

tors

aufgehoben

zeugen

Anzeige.Die
einmalige

Taste

der

erscheinenden

Sie

Sie die

die

Zeitablenkung

auf

beendet

ROckstellung

wenn

kann.Nach

Freigabe

Ablenkung

RESET

Horizontale

Mit

dem

Schalter

ten Ablenkzeiten

schen

den

kalibrierten

einmaligen

der

auf

das

darzustellende

Sie

das

fur
dasinder

Tasten

die

Signalsogut

statistische

Amplitude

Signal

die

SINGL

SWP-Taste

RESET-Taste.Der nAchste

and

aus

dem

Schirm.Nachdem

ist,

derZeitablenkgenerator

wird

verriegelt.Die

die

Verriegelung

wird

and

dieser eine

jeder

Ablenkung

des

Triggerkreises

erfolgt

durch

Ablenkzeiten

SECONDS/DIV

des

Ablenkzeitgenerators

Stufen

Ablenkzeiteinstellung gearbeitet
ten

sind

nur

dann

kalibriert,

stellunganRechtsanschlag

wenn

befindet

Horizontal-Dehnung

Dehnung

Die

mittlere Rasterteil
gedehnten
Aquivalente

als

100

Teile.Jede

stellung
den

den

k6nnen

sichtbaren

Bei

Benutzung

gewOnschten

stellen.Danach
Benutzen

ten

Signalausschnittindie

gen

.

verkOrzt

der

ungedehnten

Darstellung

LAnge

der

beliebigen 10

durchVerAnderung

Bildschirmbereich

Dehnung

der

Teil

ziehen Sie

Sie

den

Horizontal

die

AblenkzeitumFaktor10.Das

auf

dem

gedehnten

Teile

empfiehltessich,

der

Darstellung

den

lagereglerumden

gewOnschte

Ablenkung

AUTO

als

m6glich

Signale

and

and

setzt

SINGL

tar

solite

Frequenz

entspricht).Danach

and

drOcken

Triggerpuls

ein

einmaliger

Ablenkung

these

Anzeigelampe

Zeitablenkgenera-

des

neue

Ablenkung

erlischt

DrOcken

werden

fur

die

eine

and

die

gewAhIt

kann

mit

der

werden.Die

sich

die

variable

Ablenkzei-

.

Darstellung

Schirm

sichtbar.Die

Darstellung

gedehnten

der

der

Horizontallage

gebracht

Schalter

werden

auf

Rastermitte zu

SWPMAG

Position

voraus,

Ereignis

SWP

(die

Trig-

Ober

ein

dem

and

Strahl

bis

zu

READY

er-

READY-

erneute

L6sen

kalibrier-

Zwi-

.

variablen

Ein-

istinder

ist

mehr

Dar-

in

.

zuerst

.

gedehn-

zu

brin-

BEACHTE

des

Die

Position

Zweikanaldarstellung

eine
Position

korrekte

CHOP

ALT

des

Signal

erzeugt

MODE-Schalters

MODE-Schalters

.

Oberschreiten SieimXY-Betrieb

.

Diese

Darstellbreite
Phasendifferenzen,

kHz

50
den

bungen

benutzt

Phasenmessungen

schwierig

Betriebsart

von

werden

.

Signalen

.

Oberhalb

durch

GRUNDANWENDUNGSBEISPIELE

Im

folgenden

schrieben,
kbnnen.Die

letzte

Detail

duelle

McBerfordernisse

Messung

Eine

Spitzenspannungsmessung

gef0hrt

:

1.Stellen
Kanals

ten

das

zu

messende

gangsbuchsean.

Stellen

2

.

DC

auf die

DIV

einen

nal

Ober

etwa 5

OberprOfen

len

.

Schalters

3.Stellen

so

ein,

daa das

gestellt

wird

Ablenkzeit,

die

mit

werden

Hilfe

einige

desSC502

Anwendungsbeispiele

beschrieben,

da

jede

abgestimmt

der

Spitzenspannung

Sie

auf die

Schalter

den

Position

GND

Signalandie

Sie

den

entsprechenden

Position

vertikalen

and

AC

Ablenkkoeffizienten,

bis6Vertikalteile

Sie,

daa

das

VOLTS/DIV

Sie die

Signal

and

wAhlen

einige

die

Rechtsanschlag

auf

Bedienungselemente

stabil

Sie

Signalzyklen

withlen

muB

benutzt

nicht

kann

mit

dieser

werden.In
wird

die

zur

Messung

Frequenzen

Frequenz

der

nicht

das

horizontale

eigene Phasenverschie-

Grundmessungen

durchgef0hrt

werden

Anwendung

werden

nicht

auf

mull

werden

bis ins

indivi-

AC

wird

wie

folgt

durch-

AC-GND-DC

ein

and

des

benutz-

schrieben

entsprechende

SchalterAC-GND-

Sie

des

variable

mittels

Rasters

Einstellglied

VOLTS/

das

um

darzustel-

steht

.

derTriggerung

auf

dem

Bildschirm

mittels

SECONDS/DIV

des

Signals

darstellt

fur

bis

wer-

.

von

zu

be-

Sie

Ein-

Sig-

des

dar-

eine

.

ADD

APR

1982

German2-9

Bedienungsanleitung-SC

4.Stellen

Reglers
parallelzueiner

lichen
des

Signals
Sie die
so,

dab

tikalen

Sie

die

Lage der

POSITION

der

Rasterlinie dargestellt

nochimDarstellbereich

Darstellung

der

eine

Mittellinie

oberen

ein,

so

sich

mit

Spitzen

dargestellt

Positinierung

vertikale

Nomail
ENE

iFAIN

a

Vertikal-

ablenkung

Abb.2-3.Messung

5.Nun

SpitzeinRasterteilen

Diese
schen

verwendet

6.Multiplizieren

stanz

(in

VOLTS/DIV

Teilungsfaktor

UNNNUENEWN

EMIONWINEME
EMILVANIKIIAME
NNOMENNEEN

der

Spitzenspannung

kann

die

Vertikalablenkung

abgelesen

BEACHTE!

Technik

zwei

kann

beliebigen

werden

Rasterteilen)

eingestellten

.

Sie

dieinSchritt

des

Tastkopfeszuberiicksichtigen

502

Darstellung

daf3

unterhalb

wird

horizontalen

dem

deckungsgleich

wird

Mittellinie

"

MN

a

FA

ebenso

Punkten

mit

dem am

Wert.Falls

mit

der

untere
Mittellinie

der

and

der obere

liegt.Verschieben

Abb.2-3)

(siehe

auf

"""

1w

WA

eines

von

werden

fur

.

Messungen

auf

dem

5 abgelesene

Stufenschalter

notwendig,

Hilfe

des

Signalteil

befind-

Teil

Lageregler

zur

ver-

.

IN

TG1000-18

Signals

.

Spitze zu

zwi-

Signal

Di-

ist

der

.

1.Stellen
Kanals

ten
den

Ablenkstrahl

andere
Bezug
Referenzlinie

gestellt
mehr

verAndert

Werden
ren

Schritt
AC-GND-DC

Referenzspannungandie

nach

2.Schlief3en

an.Stellen
DC

auf

Einstellen

3.Stellen

daf3

das

gestellt
glied

befindet.Stellen
der

Triggerung

4

.

Lesen

Referenzlinie
stellten

zwischen

sung
gefiuhrt

5.Stellen

tiv,

wenn

befindet

Sie

den

AC-GND-DC-Schalter

auf die

Position

auf

Rasterlinie).Ist

auf

Masse

ist,

Spannungspegel

Spannung

1

stellen

DC

von

Signal

wird.Oberpriifen

des

Signalsab.ImBeispiel

.

das

.

negativ,

gewAhlt.Nachdem

dart

die

vertikale

werden

als

Masse

folgende

auf

DC

Sie

die Referenzlinie

das

Sie

Sie

den

entsprechenden

ein

(die

Massereferenz

GND

iiberpriift

Sie

den

vertikal

benutzten

Sie

eine

stabile

Sie

die

and

dem

der

Referenzlinie

Sie

die

Polaritdt

Signal

des

GND

ein

and

positionieren

die

untere

diezumessendeSpannung

wird

.

BEACHTE!

Anderungen

ein

Signalandie

Stufenschalter

Tuber5bis6Rasterteile

Sie,

Kanals

Hilfe

mit

DistanzinRasterteilen

zu

messenden

sich

Rasterlinie

obere

die

die Referenzlinie

Lage

mit

Bezugzueiner

gemessen,

and

schlieBen

Eingangsbuchsean.

werden)

daf3

sich

der

Darstellung

Bild

and

Die

fest

.

oberhalb

Rasterlinie

Darstellung

der

nehmen

vor:Stellen

ein

.

Eingangsbuchse

Schalter

kann

jederzeit

.

VOLTS/DIV

das

variable

auf

Rechtsanschlag

Bedienungselemente

ein

.

Punkt

wurde

2-4

dem

PunktAdurch-

Spannung

der

Referenzlinie

(oder

Sie die

des

gewAhl-

Sie

eine

mit

als

ein-

nicht

ande-

in

Sie

Sie

Da-

AC-GND-

durch

so

ein,

dar-

Einstell-

zwischen

darge-

die

Mes-

ist

posi-

BEISPIEL:Wenn

betragt
Spitzenspannung wie

Gleichspannungswertmessung
Um

bestimmten
folgt

German

and

Uss

Falls

ein

Ergebnis
werden

.

den

Gleichspannungspegel

vor

:

2- 1

z .B.die

VOLTS/DIV

-

Teilertastkopf
mit

Punkt

0

4,6

dem

des

auf5V

folgt

Teile

BEACHTE!

Teilungsfaktor

Signals

vertikale

ermittelt

x 5

Ablenkung

eingestellt

:

V/Teil-23V.

benutzt

wird,

eines

zu messen,

4,6

ist,

wird

muB

multipliziert

Signals

gehen

an einem

Sie

das

Teile

die

wie

EMMMMMMMMM

_

MM

SWOMMMMMMM

E

t

Vertikal
abstand

EMENEGREMM

MMMMMMMEmm

Referenzlinie

2-4.Gleichspannungsmessung

Abb

.

renzspannung

.

:

mit

Bezug

"M

auf

ADD

TG1000-19

eine

Refe-

APR

1982

Bedienungsanleitung-SC

502

6.Multiplizieren
Stufenschalter

am
benenfalls
Rechnung

nungsmessung)

BEISPIEL:Angenommen,
4,6 Teile

DIV
unter

Messung

Eine

ten

auf

1.SchlieBen
gangsbuchse
oder

VOLTS/DIVsoein,
gestellt

2.Stellen

ein,

so
stellt

ein

Rasterteile dargestellt
Rasterteil

Abb.2-5

3.Verschieben
vertikal

stattfinden
den.Mit
McSpunkte

ist
einzubeziehen

and

eingestellte

diesen

U

der

Messung

einem

DC-Kopplung

wird

.

dab

das

wird.WAhlen

Signalzyklus

k6nnen

.

dab

so,

soll,

Hilfe

ein

Sie die

VOLTS/DIV

der

Teilerfaktor

.

die

PolaritAt

Wert

betrage

Voraussetzungen
=

4,6

Teile

Periodendauer

der

Periodendauer

Signal wird

Sie

das

an,

wahlen

and

dabdas

Sie

Bedienungselemente

die

Signal

Sie

Ober weniger

Nichtlinearittkten

Sie

die

die

Punkte,

sich

auf

des

horizontalen

.

abgelesene

eingestellten

des

(siehe

vertikale

die

sei

positiv

2
wie

x 2

V/Teil=+9,2V.

wie

folgt

zu

messende

Sie

entweder

stellen

stabil

eine

wird.(Im

der

Sie

Signal

auf

schnelle

so

Darstellung

zwischen

horizontalen

Lagereglers

Distanz

Tastkopfes

Beispiel

V.Die

folgt

Oberetwa

dem

als

Spitzenspan-

Distanz

and

deran

Spannung
bestimmt

zwischen
durchgef0hrt

Signalandie

AC-Kopplung

den

Stufenschalter

vierTeile

derTriggerung

Bildschirm

Ablenkzeit,

acht

ersten

suftreten.)Siehe

mittels

denen

Mittellinie

stellen

mit

dem

Wert.Gege-

mitindie

betrage

VOLTS/

wird

:

Punk-

zwei

:

Ein-

dar-

darge-

dab

horizontale

and

letzten

POSITION

die

Messung

befin-

Sie

die

4.Jetzt

den
das

variable

DIV

auf

BEISPIEL:Wenn

den
auf

0,1mseingestellt

bestimmt

Periodendauer

Die

Frequenzmessung

Mit

Signalen
Signale

1.Messen

benen

2.Zur

prokwert

BEISPIEL:Die

nals,

Frequenz

Messung
FOr die

selben
Periodendauer.Der

in

der

erfolgt.Im

Anstiegszeitmessung

Punkten

lesen

beiden

McBpunkten

McBpunkten
Einstellglied

Rechtsanschlag

werden

5

Teilex0,1

Periodendauer

Hilfe

derZeitmessung

bestimmt

ist

der Reziprokwert der

Sie

Verfahrens

Bestimmung

gemessenen

der

das

eine

Periodendauer

=

Periodendauer0,51ms

der

Messung

Techniken

Wahl

der

folgenden

eines

Signals

Sie

fOnf

:

=

HorizontalteilexAblenkkoeffizient

werden.Die

zundchst

die

Frequenzdes

Anstiegszeit

der

verwendet

Punkte,

die

Distanz

ab.Vergewissern

des

Wahlschalters

eingestellt

der

horizontale

Teile

betr6gt

ist,

kann

die

ms/Teil-0,5ms.

betrdgt

Anstiegszeit

Unterschied

0,5

kann

mit

Dauer

eines

der

Frequenz

Periodendauer

in

von

wie

zwischen

wird

das

zwischen

beschrieben

(horizontal)

ist

.

Abstand zwischen

and

Periodendauer

ms

auch

die

Frequenz

Periodendauer(f=T).

Hilfe

des

Signalzyklus

bilden Sie

Abb.2-5

0,5mshat,

werdenimPrinzip

bei

der

besteht

denen

Grundprinzip

den

10%-

.

zwischen

Sie

sich,

SECONDS/-

SECONDS/DIV

wie

Frequenz

repetierender

beschrie-

oben

.

den

.

gezeigten

betrAgt

=

2

kHz

.

Messung

hauptsAchlich

die

Messung

and

dab

folgt

=

von

Rezi-

Sig-

:

die-

der

einer
90%-

y

WAR
Moil

Air

Abb.2-5.Periodendauennessung

APR

ADD

1982

1,10

Horizontal-

i

;~

abstand

-

~

zwischen

zwei

TG1000.20

Punkten

.

1.SchlieBen

gangsbuchse

2.Stellen

DIV

sowie

dem

Kanals
le

betrdgt

3

.

len

Lagereglers

4.Stellen

Triggerung

len

Sie

ein,

be!

Rasterteilen
stellt

Darstellung

eine

.

Stellen

eine

mittels

der das

wird.(Siehe

Sie

das

an

.

Sie

mit

variablen

Sie

die

Darstellung

ins

Zentrum

Sie

mit

stabile

SECONDS/DIV

Signal mit

zwischen

Abb.2-6

zu

messende

Hilfe

des

Einstellglied

ein,

deren

des

Hilfe

der

Darstellung

weniger

dem

10%-

.)

an

Signal

Stufenschalters

des verwendeten

Amplitude

Hilfe

mit

Rasters

Bedienungselemente

des

Signals

schnellste

die

als 8

90%-Punkt

and

die

VOLTS/

exakt5Tei-

des

horizonta-

ein

.

ein.Stel-

Ablenkzeit

horizontalen

darge-

German

Ein-

der

2-11

Bedienungsanleitung-SC

502

Verschieben

5

.
zontalen
gleich

stellt

Lagereglers

mit

der

wird

.

100%

0%

~`~~

Abb

Lesen

6

.
10%-Punkt and
sich,

daB das

SECONDS/DIV

Multiplizieren

7

.

stanz

mit

dem

stellten

dem
and

stelit

Wert

BEISPIEL

10%-Punkt

der

Stufenschalter
wird

ist,

:

Sie die

zweiten

. .

. . .

.

.

Horizontal-

F-~

abstand

.

2-6.Messung

Sie

die

horizontale

dem

variable

Rechtsanschlag

auf

Sie

am

Stufenschalter

.

Wennz.B.

and

die

Anstiegszeit

Darstellung

so,

daB

der

Vertikallinie

Punkt

der

Anstiegszeit

Distanz

90%-Punktab.

Einstellglied

die

abgelesene

die

horizontale
90%-Punkt

dem

SECONDS/DIV

wie

mit

Hilfe

10%-Punkt

des

Rasters

90%

zwischen

Vergewissern

des

Stufenschalters

eingestellt

horizontale

SECONDS/DIV

Distanz
vier Teile

auf

folgt

bestimmt

des

hori-

deckungs-

darge-

TG1000-37

dem

Sie

ist

.

Di-

einge-

zwischen

betrdgt

1Nseinge-

:

mit

Hilfe

3.Stellen

Triggerung
Kanal2ein,

stabliste

die
erhalten

4.SchlieBen

buchse

Vergleichssignal
anschluB

Sie

entweder

nachdem,

je

and

korrekteste

wird

.

Sie

von

Kanal2.

starten.Verwenden

Koaxialkabel

verz6gerungscharakteristika

Sollten

5

.

haben,
renz

zu

Stellen

6

.

daB

die

7.Stellen
ein,

so
stellt

wird

8.Stellen

McBpunkte

9.Stellen

das

Signal

zontale

det

.

10

.

den McBpunkten

11

.

Stufenschalter

am

die Si

ist

dies

nachher

beriicksichtigen

Sie

die

Signale

daB das

fiber5Rasterteile

Sie

die

Signal

.

Sie

die

sich

auf

Sie

den

Kanal1(Referenzsignal)

von

Rasterlinieaneinervertikalen

Lesen

Sie

die

ab.(Siehe

Multiplizieren

der

Triggerung

die

auf

welchem

Triggerung

das

Referenzsignalandie

Referenzsignal

Das

oderTastk6pfe

.

hale

eine unterschiedliche

be!

der

.

Stufenschalter

Bedienungselemente

stabil

Lageregler

der

horizontalen

horizontalen

vertikale

Abb.2-7

Sie

die

gemessene

SECONDS/DIV

Bedienungselemente

auf

Kanal1oder

der

beiden Kandle

fur

beide

Eingangs-

sollte

fur

Sie

Berechnung

mit

gleichen

den

der

Zeitdiffe-

VOLTS/DIV

dargestelit

werden

derTriggerung

auf

dem

Bildschirm

POSITIONsoein,

Mittellinie

befinden

Lagereglersoein,

die mittlere

Rasterlinie

Distanz

zwischen

.)

Distanz

eingestellten

der

auf

Kangle

vor

dem

Signal-

Zeit-

Polaritat

so

ein,

.

darge-

daB

die

.

daB

hori-

schnei-

den

bei-

mit

dem

Wert

.

Anstiegszeit

Die

Anstiegszeit

HorizontaldistanzxAblenkzeit

-

4

Teilex1

betrdgt

Zeitdifferenzmessung
Mit

dem

SC

502k6nnen

oder

mehreren

Zeitdifferenzmessungen

den

.

fuhrt

:

1.Stellen

AC

oderDCein

2.Stellen

Betriebsart
Grundsatzlich

lung

von

German

getrennten

Sie

AC-GND-DC

.

den

Sie

MODE

ist

entweder

die

Niederfrequenzsignalen geeignet

2-12

ps/Teil-4 Ns

4 Ns

.

Zeitdifferenzen

Ereignissen

werden

beiderKangle

Wahlschalter

auf

CHOP

Betriebsart

CHOP

.

zwischen

gemessen

wie

folgt

fOr

die

oder

fur

.

durchge-

entweder

auf

die

=

einem

wer-

vertikale
ALT

ein

.

Darstel-

50%

Ampli­tuden-

pegel

NEEMEEMM

.

2-7.Zeitdifferenzmessung

Abb

Kenal

1

Horizontal-

abstand0-:

:~

Kenal

2

TG1878-3

zwischen zwei Impulsen

ADD

APR

1982

.



BEISPIEL:Wenn

50Ns

eingestellt

schen

den McBpunkten

differenz

Phasendifferenzmessung
Mit

keit,
ren
sendifferenzmessungen

Vertikalsystems
gleich

Eingangskandle

MODE
die

Betriebsart

Triggerung
Kanal2ein,jenachdem,
die

erhalten

4.Schlie8en

von
Eingang von

vor
schluB der

chen

(180°Phasendifferenz),
tigt

and
nau

7.Stellen
so
Sie

ein

ins

wie

Zeitdifferenz-AblenkzeitXhorizontaler

Die

Zeitdifferenz

Hilfe

der

einen

Phasenvergleich

Signalen derselben

wie

wird

1.Stellen

2.Stellen
auf

CHOP

Betriebsart

Stellen

3

.

entweder

stabilste

wird

Kanal1an

dem

Vergleichssignal

Signale

Zeitverz6gerungscharakteristika

5.Weisen

werden

6.Stellen

ein,

den

Signalzyklus

8.Bringen

Zentrum

.

dervariablen
fiinf

vertikalen

Sie

daB

die

Stufenschalter

derStufenschalterSECONDS/DIVauf

ist

and

folgt

bestimmt

50

Ns/Teil

beiden

Sie

ALT

Sie

and

.

Sie

des

VertikalkanAle

durchgefuhrt

folgt

durchgefuhrt

Sie

die

auf

entwederACoderDCein

den

Wahlschalterfiirden

oder

CHOP

Hochfrequenzsignale

fur

mit

Hilfe

die

korrekteste

Sie

das

and

das

Kanal2.

Koaxialkabel

die

Signale

mit

Hilfe

Einstellglieder

Rasterteilen

die

Bedienungselemente

Signale

dargestelit

Sie

die

Darstellung

Rasters

der

horizontale

vier

Teile

betrdgt,

:

x 4

Teile-200Ns.

(Verz6gerung)

besteht

zwischen

Frequenz

k6nnen

Schalter

ALT

ein.Grundstktzlich

for

Niederfrequenzsignale

der

Triggerung

auf

Referenzsignal

vergleichende

zu

Das

Referenzsignal

liegen.Verwenden

entgegengesetzte

muB

des

stabil

SECONDS/DIV

.

durchzufiihren

biszuder

werden

:

AC-GND-DC

Bedienungselemente

auf

welchem

Triggerung

oderTastk6pfe

theseamEnde

Stufenschalters

eine

ein

.

dargestellt

wird

.

mit

Hilfe

Abstand

wird

die

Abstand

betragt

Darstellung

200 Ns

die

M6glich-

zwei oder

Grenze

Ein

Phasenver-

.

der beiden

.

Vertikalbetrieb

eignet

.

Kanal1oder

der

beiden KanAle

fur

beide

an den Eingang

Signalanden

sollte

Sie

zum

mit

.

Polaritdt

beriucksich-

VOLT/DIV

der

Triggerung

werden.Stellen

ein,

so

daI3

der

Lageregler

zwi-

Zeit-

.

mehre-

.

Pha-

des

sich

and

die

der

auf

KanAle

zeitlich

An-

glei-

auf

von

ge-

etwa

Bedienungsanleitung

Kenai

Kanal

(Refe

I

renz)

(Nacheilend)

2

MEN~MEN

sia

Horizontal-

abstand

T

j

--

Abb.2-8.Messung

9.Stellen

CONDS/DIV
(Kanal1)

Vertikallinie

entspricht

Ablenkzeit

10.Lesen

entsprechenden Punkten der

Multiplizieren

11

.

(Ablenkzeit),umden

zu

erhalten

BEISPIEL:Wenn

and

die

sehen,

Phasendifferenz-HorizontalteilexGrad/Teil

Die

Phasendifferenz

Phasenmessung

Durch
variable

sungen
einfachste
Zeitdehnung

BEISPIEL:Wird

trAgt

die

10-4,5°/Teil.Abb.2-9

8

mit

dem

tet

ist.Bei

tr3gt

die

Phasendifferenz

Die

Phasendifferenz

Sie

das

so

ein,

genau

8Teile

einnimmt

45°

des

Zyklus

stellt

praktisch

Sie

die

.

die

Ablenkzeit45°

wird

die

Phasendifferenz

Teilex45°/Teil-27°

-

0,6

Erh6hung

Einstellung)

mit

Weise

gedehnte

Unterschied,

einem

Phasendifferenz

der

holier

Aufl6sung

wird

X10 erh6ht

die

Horizontalabstand

I

8

Teile

(360°)

variable

daB

ein

zwischen

.

(SieheAbb

horizontale

Sie

die

exakten

horizontale

pro

betrdgt

mit

holier

Zeitablenkgeschwindigkeit

k6nnen

die

.

Zeitablenkung

Zeitablenkgeschwindigkeit

zeigt

daB

-

Horizontalabstand

gedehnte

-6Teilex4,5°/Teil-27°
betrAgt

-

der

Phasendifferenz

Zyklus

derzweiten

(3600:
Grad

als

Signaleab.

Distanz

Betrag

Teil

betr8gt,

wie

27°

.

Auflosung

zweikanalige

durchgefuhrt

Ablenkgeschwindigkeit

dasselbe

die

Zeitdehnung

:

Ablenkzeit

27°

i

Einsteliglied

des

Referenzsignals

2-8.)Jedes

.

8 Teile-45°/Teil).Die

45°/Teil

Distanz

(in

Teilen) mit 45°/Teil

der

Phasendifferenz

Distand

wieinAbb.2

folgt

10fach

Signal

von

sechs

.

-

SC

r

TG1878-4

.

von

zehnten

and

Rasterteil

tar

.

zwischen

0,6Teil

(Teile)

betrdgt

bestimmt

(ohne

Phasenmes-

werden

mit

gedehnt,

45°/Teil

wie

Abb.2

eingeschal-

Teilen

x

(Grad/Teil)

502

SE-

den

-8zu
:

Auf

.

der

be-

be-

-

ADD

APR

1982

German

2-13

Bedienungsanie)tung-SC

Kanal

(Referenz)

1

502

Kanal

2

MWEEMNEWME

MEHIMMINESSM

i

Horizontal-

differenz

Abb.2-9.Phasendifferenzmessung
erh6hter

Ablenkgeschwindigkeit

.

mit

i

hoher

TG1878-5

Aufltisung

bei

interfacestecker

Am

rackwArtigen

denefreiePins
dungen

re

EinschubfAcher

nen

mit

tionen

zwischen

Informationen

tere

anleitungen

farden

zur

Verfagung.(Siehe

Bracken

der

der

Riickwand

Interface-Stecker

SignalanschluBfurSpezialanwen-

einer

Stromversorungseinheit

verdrahtet

den

EinschubfAchern

hierzu

Stromversorungseinheiten

werden,umspezielle

finden

stehen

Kapitel5).

Sieinden

nichtverbun-

Ein

odermehre-

errichten.Wei-

zu

Bedienungs-

.

kbn-

Funk-

German

2-1

APR

4

ADD

1982









-

-fjt~V9-f-3~

a

3

7iJ:P6062

BW,

fi,toc-A1t-t-1:

4'-f

aTI"o

9EVV1A15MHz,

Wa

SC502MMABI

P6060ffilUUP6105MZl"o

X10:1

1

;ri9VRb>

-r-

3JftTl-b,,

TV

oll^

y'

L
P6062

P6105

JA

v

-

2

B

=11

RE

IN

SC502Vu2*j'f',

lClUfi3,
&ZL,,

L I

a0J~--

lEMte1~Jlbt

-

C

-

Ftoo

C'

Operating Instructions-SC

502

AcO»

:bbMODE=

-

mjif

,t-*)LCD

w

I

ct~1a

POWER

,

a

F

e-A-1-ALTM

U

-C

ADDAPR

1982

2-1®

16t*V

tVWU'1

055A

Japanese

2-

1









ILL









































-2

















T~f~



Operating

MONIZ

~1[i~

Instructions-SC

T

b

,E)FT

.MEWE-4X*To

;t,

IIiC7

VOLTS/DIV

1

f770)i

l~~t

VOLTS/DIVA-f.Y-1-Z

To

t

L,

of

LZ~L

$

m

SECONDS/DIVA-f

~

%5}t1SWP

~L~~O)~7~A-f

"

ihCI

-J1,0)'W

1.SC5029'

L~~'o

a

;Jl

,O-

A

L

SECONDS/DIVA-f

11

.~1~,

MAG7J'thf'FLt

E

CMODE

~Tr

502

A,L7~JJhC

.y

-&W~1p7izm

2040)'ftIt0)Kf-

10~'(~~0)~+,C~

~~Z

00)A33I~F-

w~1~~lll

;

i~POWER

~

:tfdt

f~fw%6A

-3r-0)7"J

<

fd

b

:~-

.

"

Z'F~t

OFFf-

iJ

t

IZ

:

A

. "

1Lpq
a$'J3'

L

;

b

a

)Mlr-

V-

3

.F

4.1

Cf-4YNCHI

5

.

A-j

6.FOCUS

-7b>M1

7

.J~J

zI

8

.h

~

71'

vZ24a

ALM~;~-

~~ft6A

1'yo-7-1tZl1-r~

:

=

7

5+M4fcemL1-4'o

L

POSITION

*3F

%

F

;

"L3k

3

-

JfA~~1'

Ff'M

i

0'1'

m

v'1

L-A

;LPH45~*-THRgb>

CHI

Afi=j

L

*'~

9.3divOEr®T7$fd5JAJXg(60Hz7'f

7~~)

CCALfaT--~1J>~T~~'L~~"o

h

1

-

ea-

1

:3

10

.

TRIGGER

-trj

-

ro

-f :1-1--C.717.

.-r~1-z-

11.&%4

AISz

M7)

*39

17o

VIEW

CD

VP5~

zaD8EF0)-7

RA

: .-

9-7m

IL5VT1kHz0iE3ARIt--I1)7FT&'MK'L-1

I~fd

3

h"'J-

i

Fo-~~

L

~"a

t~-~

h

L

t~~c0~~1<~4i=-fit

"I7'

o

;1

~r

ir-fVWL1°-o

t

9

a

#~

-fA=1*7

'Z_

3

KZCAL~I'7~r

.5divFMT

Lh'1

3F

-

yCe

INTENSITY

h

V

-~~

Z

iZlt6+t-f

Ji'fq~

Fb>F9~'

>S~24A(5$

c's

tfC-

T

t

Czm

1!1~IcL-11-o

2.SC502'0»
INTENSITY
FOCUS

MODE
POSITION

CH
CH

CHIVOLTS/DIV

Variable

I

CH2VOLTS/DIV

Variable
CH2AC­POSITION

SECONDS/DIV
CAL/SWP

SINGL

SLOPE

LEVEL
SOURCE

COUPL

(AUK)

I

2

AC-GND-DC

GND-DC

(*3F)

MAG

SWP

t

12.F

v

-~~

i

h

i

(xC

'otz

o

NSITY
t"aR53'l~tE~r~~

.-~~~HA3C

~iho-~~

"

ofS53'~rol.%

77f~76~~-~<

t~

I~~73Fa~C7~~CoRSj'I~~~

3'lcfcblZINTE­h~CIL

o

L~

6A7)
~o

CHI

433~Lftll
C05fAX

0.2
;

filfflI,-*T

DC

0.2
t©

DC
cp3fAZ

5m
mil]L-ffTIPP1,2A,t

t7

(9ftz:I

Zt,"-5US)

:H

+

CoAfil

CHI
AUTO

=

4*19

~~FC7-Jl

1Q.FOCUS

.

INTENSITY:':

Q

"

~~~~l~

a

0

-ii

,,

F

.

o-~~

:

TCD

7

:

-7fe

L

o

tf

~'o

h

Japanese

2-2

ADDAPR

1982

Operating

Instructions-SC

502

REV

MAR

1983

Japanese

2-3















































f,



)





















t~{

Operating Instructions-SC

TRIG

VIEW:CC7,-f

CRT{~
MODE7-f

,t7fpAN

POWER
CHI:~
CH2:~FtifiA

ALT

PT

h

CHOP

i4

~a

I*0041r-

CHIMINUS

1N,,CUCH2

CH

ti-iUt

VOLTS/DIVA

-f

-7

t

tl1-4'o

cT

AAfOfT-X-

L-ro

OFF:SC502V-F~ARMf

.i

A

F

- 1

,

1t,»*Tcttl11-o

.2b~jETLLst'LI-'o

jA~ti*

L

"

#sa~

:

f~+7

.I,C21R&PTZ,

IC

i.,C

t

{z

n4a11AvjhMk"l

;'ZZ'"ro

CH2

:

j4ftl-XC

POSITIONS

LI

-'o

-f

v9-

T1-2-5,

:

-1-r.

o-~

{Lt~~t~L

10.1

CPJLPTlU-,

CAL-51V

:3

Cf!tfl]

{Ltd3

"

~

A{~GlGahlJC~l$t~PILTfNC'7Z

y'o-~

TT

t L

o

i

F

Cf

"

o

-)I

,:VOLTS/DIV

502

v~F

teMLiAUL

-

'o

'x1JT'

21~

'c

A'9lms/cm

-~'

o

L!T

tit

i

-

tT,~T

n

o

.

n'

I~ICf

.C3tAItfy~,1%

F9~ifAYt~

F

L!CPCI

:t

7 L

te

$M~IC#~hT

-~°

.

r-,~~250kHz

-

:--

JETCfEtr`ffAA

kZCLb

l#

-

7'

o-~t~

?-f,,

at--

~'o

A91ms/cm

t

higL'a

A, 2

6

t--bb0

,

CAL-D

I~~~"o

0)

~F-C&tom

It

T-Y-

L -3~

T

6

1,5

f~

CAL(

-f:

~I

SECONDS/DIV

NI

.

itMvljIcvftit

{r t

LC101A

LtSh

SECONDS/DIV

it

t~~~Q~I*Aef43Ir-ilCAL

o

i

F

-

1

7

-f

-,'L,/PULLX

X

-f

r

-1To

t-a

,

r:C~

AMPLE

ODAfS7~~JOD

:3

i

10SWP

9~

X.~1n

ttl3

:%~.

MAG

rTH

i

.

.C

7f*raUfi'VIttit6$

-f5r-

T#r~

I*,

I

-K;J-&~t
o-n,t~

F

-~-

L

-1

7

t­o

tit~t"i119OCr51*teTL10114fi~l0t0)

TRIG'D

A

J53oll

.

READY7i~

F')

:V-Q~

W9-t,,httlZ6

naIc7

"

;

5

AL11- .
POWER?

i-f:

SC502fIr-%9tib,&J`tti-co

a*

-18,;cyi~b>A,kau-11"o
i

RESET#TLt°3

F

L11r.

:

#M~IfFRC04{LWIte

-Y-

9-h ,

F97-~-K#PL-i''3i

"

t3itJ>TFI~,Y',Z4"3~

'LZ

JJD~Z

ra'hlt~~P#cL

IZI.F

o iJJtd

'JY-

F

'J

t~~7~fJ

7~~J
DC-GND-AC-7-f

t

73:

AfJfAY~~0BNC=1

,

3)'MtojANL-11'o

DO:7~y7fA~C~f~

t

fl

-1--r.

GND

:*'tTffm

c~Nl73C1tC}A,

.3.Y

CA

O

CAI]IJ

717J

JL-11-o

AC

.

11

fA-x

-

CD

DCa3}ItPIZ4---ttl-11'o

CAL0.6V:C C,f

,~J

.f~73~t~CC

POSITION=,i

EXT

TRIG/AMPL
9$nA)Jft]
C-DC.G

,ACtUtIl

2fq.O

F

CBNC=1

4)J-::,
.6V

o

-)L,:
:

$$

*

:

[4100)N®29Ir-f-e,f~i~

ct

5t~~

1

:

A)J:3; t-

nA

t

C7J

.7~fA~'t~>1~~~'

if`'

TC~}c

t~

F

'J

n

7

3

T$o

F')

~iAC#f~Lt3iTT7~

3

Jt

h

.

f

t

fAXIi}<

*S'f

.09rdA)J0)

7 3

Z

73b>1;W

-'99Lt-

A)JfA-U

h i2

L*b!%

L

~~'o

L

"

M

C

~"o

SINGLE

~-F{r-tshI-r,

ETPPL*

-j-d-A,
fM
COUPLINGM*'3

-F~

AC

'J

-11-o
fA

'o

,,

LF

{t,

UTCfXTJIlm

.

C

F 97LEVEL

C#A

A

#F*

3i:

SWP#~

AUTO"

ti-AN

L

3

ib~VPL!,tl;S9:

LI-r

cCt

7vf-~Itt"

F'J~TCDCfa'GT}6

~-Iz

cL'o

F

7fX

f7f'G7~"~

REJ#

F

'J~vM=It4-t-

tti-11'

>

t'3

o

9

i:~Ct

F

9

3i:Cfi3it~~#~

t'

1fkr91h'47btt6L

L

.

t-il&CN'gIIt~

Lt3its>3}I~~f',t~'IT,

A

te$7oI-ra

i

:F9

t'Cp1MICJ0J-"3 F

.

3

its

,

9LiZ~

J

3

LZ'F9t

;~-

A

)VIMIL*a'°n c

ti

I

I'c~

t1I~r,

°

s

t--#~ZTIt,

HMIc1*At

.,SOkHz1

'1

3

:,

3

LZ

F

"

teA

t'fA-FJCDChPJ~IJ
L-11'

.

9~vMAILM

:li4--ttl, 5kHz

~"L

Fl.U`RES

3-FL

$Mq

'J

7'f-

~C

;40

t~

I

5

F

ti

T

Japanese

2-

ADD

APR

4

1982

,











~

















3















SOURCEM
ii

X

-

4~~--

U

ANl,I1'o

CHI#l,t~ri

L

fah1--

i
CH21YL,~'

M,Lfdh-1
LINE(CHI

MM,

-

-

r

LCH2Ml,%f

:-b>

-r

EXT#Pl,,'Sri

-

p1h,h

Lf-

n

SLOPES-f

LEVEL:%

;

5

JAlh®A

;~-

igNl,I

i

:

f

~r

h'J~VQMIr-Ma

:CHII~7~7JttLZ'6~6fA

o

i:CH2

.

b

)VA

_~

ho-,;i,

Ir-

ODOR

4~b>h')

.$

h'JtVA)J:3*79KMMLttL

:3$

1

-43-

MIL

t-C

717J

~

ib~r]II4Ir-PttLtzlltf)

37

~VmfLfch11-

l,z)flobtLll-o

:Wlfe70-

:h'I(-°F,,

-

r

.

a

;5{m--Ub>

4~

h

tt}3h'I

~z#sa~

-~'^~

-

F'7),h'Jt~

.

~VM~0

;Lph'1~Vl"

I

h

h'17

9

Operating Instructions-SC

®

*-A-8div,

~~C

it

o

H91cl11*C

L

7}C*1OdivT$divIJ:0.25-fi3-

zI~,

~t1

I~11t,zrQ~ttIzL,3tz-6,),IN1

fc6[fj)tb

WIM

i

;

f4

1

;

h

O

tl-11-.

-JIB

INTEN

ft;e-Fifz-FLN

400;1-;-IL

0ToXAmm

6~0091b>A,0LCRTZ*){*bl')AIlz,

It3CL7)1&)h9

:--o

FOCUS

-~~L

L

t

f~M7)t-~i~~6

"

i,-7,

h

WLb>1

9*C#

;

~

.

fd~z6~

.~ttiC~~faCL~Li~>

~t

1t

:Idtit~

-C

~Cr1~

5

5

.t~ic'

h

l

L -%-

502

C

"~'o

A

.1-

.~

7

;,

r-6t,

i

MFOCUS~

5}7J<A$5j'CI

1

2ISSM(-r

M~~

X

-tUry

t~S

a

o-n,

h

+1

J

~.~~zt'LI

:3F-7Y_-rte

L,1~)

Ir--ZfQ

I,'fc'rtLlI-,&n-f

h

p-~~C

VA-11

COeElEt,-,~)LMz~MGtill"o

i~t10VT,Zi~I~

;~Cf~~1

Zoo

Iff

jqj

.LC*Tb>I

0~<hPIL,-11-

l~

FOCUS

>5>Ipl

,

77TYM

"

:U-CM3
i33-7

s4

-

n7~f~F~i~~f~f~

;j

IfIRAIrfd6t

.

Z1R

MTt

IJ

:!EZl

=*%SFC24Ar~MCA

COft(Z

, 1-U

-

7,k"=1

'15rOD24Ae

INTENSITY

5vO)MEz,

-

~C

lI~DC-2MHz

¬

TCA

-

Iffin

C

7*-

- .

)VMb>

=i

t

5

V-CA"9

$717Jl~

7

t

,

:,

:

ADD

APR

1982

Japanese

2-

5















J





~













c













f



















Operating Instructions-SC

502

fiiJ71,-3

v

AeCHI

%,U-C,

7

-f

Lf~~"T~

.

MINUS

-~

CtiIr-J

r9

-

SC502f_CNiK-*

~-r

z

04Ru

iTi!

hI-~', ,'f',fJ~73

117v-7C-f

3~k

6

"

tERIt

5fs'7

2190)A7VRT--

i7,

°o-

fL-5

9'~Z~71,at_

lid

7$tC

F

7'l

yMT_CA

C~T~>1~

MODE7-f

~,L,

'))SOURCE?

F

'LPF')~vfAF~gL

-

23R*W'f'F(

Wl1"3*%Tb,14
TftffJT

L'xl1"b>

-f ,~iz
LZixNTLIA11o

.

,

-3

;

1'A

;t1'1-"a

CHOP--E-F

.

:h~:>5>

F"-E-

6tIZC1150Aes/div

Jt

5tdigLIN~I*ZIt,

ib300T7AA3

F9iVSOURCE7-f

3

~,C

~a~f

1f

tw'3-F" -X-

~7Kt~

~t~CH1-1t_IICH2

TLtd~>~,

I

1

?

bb

OD

t

600mV

1%Z'-I',

vai"-7= s

MtRPJT-'o

o

i*wIC-t

F)

ALTS-

h

FI1'r-__<ZCWI*

Ti

,tom

c

--r

fil

EYJtd

~T-f

i~

RfIjfXf5-~M~fa

L

CfA~~-

9wTWALZ

)5FM0W

~-

~

F

U11--

C

~

~

MODE7-f

T~~1

FCC-f

-

Wi

t

a

v-

IC-r

wCfA~~-~>

w

:F-

MODE?

~CfA

fURfQ-X

-

~JC

-f

5F-

--

r-1,ftf1"3Ik4I1,

1.SC502MC)tMA)7XE~eC
L " a

2

.VOLTS/DIV

fq

-F,I~J~~7

3.CHI

4

LCH2CPOSITION=1

6-CHIb>CH2Ir--t

-3r

-

fjft;~-

1~tf

L-1--o

.Zr~r-

fi%4)L,b>GF7

LCH2CDC-GND-AC,7-f

HI

F

LZTto

CH

MWIL&Stl"7z

F7+HR~~~Mt0TWtaDCIAS~

(CCSiL

2fCO

~

~~"o

C`78

t_~~1~.

.LZ~$~

ir_LZ_Ft

t 3

fA

VOLTS/DIV

iFo-A,IIMODE~-f

F

Lt_I4M,

L

c is<MR-1-3'j

hftRfn~-

L

WC

7, ;

f

v

:

i7

,

-3r-

6-Hl

P~

~F

;~p1:9

:C&M-t-v

fi

SIL11,

i4A,
5

KCf*f'F1r_

2

L

" o

.

~

~~IC

~

OD

"

;

;Wt

C

23R*t#'f'F(

OPf

A,

IL-~'3~,

t_i

a

.Z'f

Er,6b>0)fa

)i'1irl*1t

04fjolWf,*C

04fMNN

.*h>tsC"4-AIII

t

.chIT

.

/7"-E-F)

-3F-

a

+i

f

2

cT

r~i~l'~>7rZ,

- ~5IcnfagN%tg

9~-

.

fia*JV1-1t-'It9L

:b7D

2-»fA=

FTAc%7"TImo

MODE

wPa9

T"$

TC

-,

t

I.AC84ft11Wf,

P~j_Nt

f

zr

?-f

Y-QMT-J&A

3

,AiLi

-

(LfSh

t_

r,Ic

~JV2b>~C~JAR

Lb>L,

SCD

-

-7-;~,CH-

v

,

t

6~$F

fe%T1-Jt

fA_'j

7~11

:

~

.3ET

CHOP

N_~

_c

RI~

z

o

5

lc

wC

&Z

hC7r,

~'Lt_

CAL

'1

1117.

~~v~

~

A7

~"PR0,re.fliTA6d9j]~t

i

"

7

-

LC#iu7-7J~

ltJJl41

O

DC-GND-AC7,

Z4_~-r3

jE_th

t:5.k

Ir_.t

--)

Z

t

Y5Q)t

VOLTS/DIVA-f,,~-"T

iFo

-A,

VOLTS/DIV?-fv~

g11'ifS

~J

75

-

-

7fffwi-T-IC7

t~~1fiCr

f'F3CLb>TLzImo

-3

-

-f

r

7z*~j

11

.

jWIpJ

U`VOLTS/DIVCCAL

till-.

MYg

CAL

<

i

VXit14

-:z"

T,

1;tiI-

9-F

7`)7f

VOLTS/

FvN®,

:j

:jiF

3

;

50V/div

i~>

.

l

Aef-c+

C#;A-h-

-wb

o

T

3f

C&iERZfi1

-1Z"r4

-

fA~'J

~'

tA,o

t_SC502MC:- fi

-

~1"3

M~_

DIV

iFv

>r_TL_

-7FL

~0z1

:)<

FIt:It

v-70)

L,

f

-

AN

-

tt

L

L

Japanese

2-6

ADD

APR

1982



















Oq



























c't

fd



AC{~~TL~

.

{A~CDCf~fS}6~7~7JQ~~C$

AC{-2WzaD{9W9Z-3dBAtin,

~6"

CJ

141

h

;

6

3b>6L7C

tlIT

~~-TM

.

b,3RtIIT.AC{AWTTli,

fdDCFyQS}i

{q-S-CDCF~CS}C~~J~~~~iLl
C50HzU-FC{-~C9

;

76~~ARzJ~77Clr~$~>~

GNDf2WTIJ:.

7~~J{AT-~

~-iR

;t~{A

.,

(t

75,

AC~
C

Lb;TL4

SC

q

~~~"f~

I-ro

~~1MS2C#$#n,~i~LZ~-

>1M520J#~#j~,

il

liZ

t

~

"

1OHz

ACfAS}

C

cT~>

a9

qC

f

Operating Instructions-SC

F9ff"l

F49F9

0Ufd9

CA

1ff

7f

i"FUf3U

490F
n{-A

.4°3,
Nhl

;EPF 9iT6C1Lflj~UTLkJj'o

It,

c~

5'BAR{AIiJETz~tj3{AT3

-7

;U9>1

F')ti

T=-FAe

b"

IJ fl'J

61,

SOURCEA

7C-R5}CMATd1WIIlFI

SOURCE7,

IL

52/>Wb>J5

cVNT

-f,~CHI

h

tl-",

i'fLINEONWT6l,1UM~5

F

9

i,~FEXT

4,

7v

L-9CA)JIr-mWL$tl-11-

IN

777

-f

o

=7

6L11

,

;HJt

9U<IlA

4

4-

~r

iL*PLt

fd

UZ'84PaUN

ET

UCH2M-t

-f:,

T

502

F

'1

F,-f"FCIR

-CEO)
o

tLf_~$

i~

l

~
t-ta

:C~

,<1~$

M~ZT

.

2

3

.

4.7`7J

5.DC-

f1LZl

.17LLb>J5h''14±h,

1,

"0

D-ACS

-

-7p

-f

,

v

-

~',~

~

"

tcz--trI~',

3~T~Sfl~ii~

$

t~~:~

#A

°

GND-ACS

f~0)jmZal1~t

GNDdz

~~

~o

33F

-f,~~

ZLl~I1r.

C

:-t,,F

a077-72'Cit-

7\77

nA

Ltt.3

bl3tt-M

ACIc-t,F

C

{T=b~DC-GND-AC

-2,93:

l~

t'I

M

ME

L,

TV-1i4

I

L.

o

:~9~>1

-11-.

t-v(]

.

:/

SI-

I

E~,Il

UZ,

EXT

IN7`77~

tr]L

;fi4TTF9~V

A

t

td

<

Z

t.RIMC:

L-

h

{

ACM*

'1

T

l,F

F 9

F'))VMIMIcMq-"a

'1

{A-~~

7{R4

3r3J

-J-i-4

AC{iLWT6l

~ii

:#

#rT

ttL,F9~V

"

:3

aFv-iL

?rIr-ldlt3f~ffj45-

6r-I&,

0~

0~1~'

3CLb;Z

L~

Ct

-1-ra

'G53'iift'

F'Iiirl~CDC&cS}b>Ml-

"o

01EQ,

~IIG"

F 9

~T

, ;

Lp

:WL,

fl4rHjN{*

fVCOUPL

f~

I

t

til

I

r

WRANA
{AT-ail

L

LF

L'o

~',

REJ{A'LT-1l

.tC5kHz

DCJ~Sj10~~

t1.,C5kHz

t

~

>6F'1~i

.~UC-r~-CZ

>4

~°

3n°n

FCfA-r-

­I2:I

,

ADD

APR

1982

Japanese

2-

7

























'



U



3



























-





7





Fo-n

.Operating

hv

53'7 h

SLOPES

T7
11,

h

CIRV7o

7

F~JfJ'

-A

ZL,1

h

&M

7)

,

Instructions-SC

70-7

;f

"

IF

'1

~VSLOPE7

1i-~`

'1

SF-

SLOPE

-1_ro

4 v9-;

"

h'11V

-

F-4"3M1±75~Z1,-11'a

,

A'elEPAtctr_t

Y

i

SOURCE,COUPLi6.1:

'1

LEVEL

t'>~

3

-f

~r

~I+f

Ih

L,11-

7-f

l,b>l,Wt

)lZ

--

e't-EL

<

Vn11

.

LEVEL

e

LEVEL=:-,

=ih

o TiL'

r

"

Wtl°

:ih

PTWCAT'~

FzE-F

;t
t_'*,

y

LEVELS

7"I-

i

'1

M~I

F9iV

b,h'11

L*b~C20HzLJ(T,

i2

75>f<t0otr-11,W1°t

m

7

h

o-

(:I

7'1-7iillEl0WH!~*L'
l,t--XTie4_:L11
L

LlTo)

502

-f

,~It,

h

"Ip7~R5>'T

(fa~

Ci

i

t

%S~t-Itt~~TT3

751-Ih

-

~"3i~T;e

3 C E

o

-A41,h

Lh'1

-

rS

o-w;~-t

h

UUSLOPECRZU"ll"a

o-w

-F-

F

rx

;'at 5

o

-

wb>!E

;

%ti3LTRIG'D~5i7WAIRUI

1,-g1179-7

-

r

.

(LEVEL='ih

-

'1Q>~~fA-°~'
h'1)'4"3~>

3gII,*tli

'r}O~

T°~>

T'fdL~C

h

LLt,J~fJf

l

f4-Btz-0)tc,

b>WINT-4-

o

'1

LEVELS

~VPIAII

h'1~VgF5CIETE

,

v

1-1-6MtCtI,

at751~7-1

mopf75fp71c

AUTO*

<

L

I

h 9i~fA

~rb>h'1fic~wZ,

-

-t

t

:

tl+'5'fd

T

-

9

h#'L,

o-AcDR)tIlllEL,L

C~f7

ifJz3F

~'L3

5>

Lbi-<35

L6~Q

t

E

a~fSh,

tr

d.Yo

:Cfa~1AAR

nai~

S'

SLOPE

iFv

L,

P%

l

.-11°o

+~fS

h'1t

lY-'

L,

A_;5

V)t

; --

6C&CtfijfT

_W_4m~1{-F

L-~r

jt

5

iLSINGLE

tmTT

9

~Vtti3<k5tch9~V

GLE

SWP*,

fv

C

F'1

b'*TZ~

~'L

h

~

4-

ZDi

"

F~J~3°t-11

,Mir_

v

x'Zl°3L

IF

t

.~t~L,ll`o

Ch'1

3tfItV;tl,t--jrCT
~~Fo-~t

"

SECONDS/DIVA

;J-

THL13tr-11,

b

5'tcrA-~r;

r

­SWP

LN ;

5 t~tf

97a;~,

"

oen,-~

TNg1~Will

tlWIb,-T-~r
T1~o ~ 4

3

~

v-5'b''1

-5Ir-ItRESET

.F

.LICI:h,_EJJNMPI

t7

Th97_'3

~v"=7ih

,

~~o1'77Ip7ILQLZ,

-17r

6CL i~Wb>IV)I-

,'+

i

b>,'~

t

lit~TILIi

QM-~

0I,RESET*

3,

~%h~

,

-t'

vFttL

NIKCHO-SWP

°8tc,9-Cit

CC=

,aF

o

-

)LteA*0D7MTMuZ<

;~-

ffhd. Y o

-f

.

Yc-rh9~Qj$b"

AUTOt3r

~r .

4'Zo3VZIr-U,&M

i'3`~

e(7

h1/-1-"0)iC

~rii»-FLMti-1-~"o&

1,I-'0°ffa1-hirii

#fad1-t~

~'L~~'o

-

:L~3WLW143IlAkftt,Z

READY

tS+i

:3

7i7°1~#fa

ZlU#~l,ZTt0,

:it

.ai"-lel

.(CAL)T

ctiicI:-D-c,

"rF97rcT-le

o-~~I~mIl,

6ZIC_1339Zt-11

.

~hC~~c~~~ft<

JET/,

-~'

It

MzC

F

L'

CP'
C

n

.,SIN-

'1-~

H0M

Ycc-f

Z~;

"

t7

-?JL"F ~J

b,h

ti

t

Wig

F~~f~l~~~t~o

F9ii

hZJ`1~

.

f~Ib~IT

1Alft

U-1t}ho

Japanese2-8

f1~Ji~l

z

h'1

1

"

;5

TRIG'D

L

,

FTCWINO'tt

AUTO*-'

)f-

3

h7"JLtz-e4CAUTOMZ

F'

~5

h9)V4

o-)t0DWtb>t-E

J

tWrLN0Ftl,

i

b>

L

4

Z

l,

I

3IL11NORM-e-

-

.

;

C)

3

L"C L

I,

TRIG'D~5:-7°tl

&RW1,

;~,

1~>

,

(]l,L~~t~L~Cflzt~tz~3t~1~,

f'c

#~~1~1~~3z~~~t

ADDAPR

.ZL~~

1982





































TC







Cr$a~ldiv>5>,

',

~,~~~'Lf~~a~

~ZPOSITION:j>

U

.,

19

-

c-

LN

11-.

#~a~

I

CFpy~IL

$L

POSITION=:.-F

SWP

MAGI

NDS/DIV7-f

IJ

:SECONDS/DIV7-f

,us/div

X-Yffflf

Z

(fsZ~rAt~7f57

I~td

< ,

L,'c

h

SIJC~Y1

-

~1,~

F

L

'

-f,-3r-

r

-~F

i~t

o

3ILI

a

Mfftft;~-

"

)

~'

Lf~~,

~

&ILSWP

IC

°

c

{r~~

MAG-7-f

b4bfFLZo3A

10

-

CS1--,

r5~-b>0

.5,uCI4i

iL~

LZ~T~

SECONDS/DIVA

ZIP,

i=Cti~C~7TCf~~IL,

IL'~~-~TJr

~

I~l00divLJ(~Z~"

zt[~

;c%5it-PP70atmsc

CWAUSECO

t--MLt

.tt[KJ<1fg1*6

3L~(X-Y)

-f

.C

,-)I-

3

~~

T

.R53'

h -11"o

O)AMP09

t~>'Z=

o

7}C

J411

.t0

.05

>5>~>~

~}~

1

ILLZM~fe7~=-t49jc

2

GL

LZVOLTS/DIV

TtX1..3

;

tiffflU-

3
1

;

i

IL,

4.AWPOSITION=1

k

~>

o-~~~QLZ,

5.e-4i~>~

.

T

1NItf

.

P,kffll-

-t

7

46MIIEMMILC5

.F'J

ii

tl3t

SECONDS/DIV7

t

I1t

cC~#?iL7~3

3~~

i,*

b9-t

i*

.z

-f.,9-Z~i(!J

iL

L

I

7'o-1319!

v-A

~f~9C~-7C1~>y>~L

e-7

$~i

Operating Instructions-SC

wODC-GND-AC,7

*tuv~ra

)LCDC-GND-AC-7

5

1

t--i16div

VOLTS/DIV

ZcL;

EPE

,

AeL,-C,

LI

:3

9ct

-f,~F

-f

a

-r

-f

o-jL,-'eQL,

iL

L

~"o

90FCFWb>,

POSITION=i:~

*'TL

.>~I~

l~

h7Cl~

;ilAt~Str

~

"~,

;eeGND

.,AC

C

bT

tc

Fv-,,L,b,

.

L, f-

-

Tb

Ci~S<

502

,

F

MODES

45~ftll!Tbr,

ILl

.7

-

FLLtt,%

0)'(3Y~

L'

A

Ij-71R1gMSE-AC

r-

IL~~l~~i~'®1l~ILtat

-

t

T

L?l0.

-'J-

-l

-f

y-3~-

0)CHOPIAWZ'I12M*X-Y

ALT'fjlT-IlM5tl.5;t}A,

o

Z

:0)-:E-FTIt50kHzg!Z'0)1l-J~ro9C

.

J~~'a

"

r-

t

I

I~Z11

177

momall
EMEEMEMEN
wasmaimorm

:

br

a

A

¬

zaro]f

MM

""

mmummommom

I/E

""UM

MEMEMEMEMN

MOM"""

MMEN

TJIOOD-18

s-s®

aVf0)L_'-lXEM*

A

2An0)A%f

;kT

6

.

CDfol

t

L°f

ILirLI

-e

fT-

td70)tztf1lfmT81T0

*

~5z

;1~11f~12

1r

.

p1

iL,

VOLTS/DIV

7

-f

ADD

APR

1982

Japanese

2-

9





Q



1





















T











3II





~l'~>









Operating Instructions-SC

.e-

~,

11

DIV

Af91CIt&CAfeTfl

t

e-

4k

e-7ME=4

-

-,

'C ;b

L*To

MOVIRffA4

efr

1

IzI,Z,

MCAAWp7b>4

7

-f

r

7

%1E=fK

i ;

,tlf--M

S*bbZ

gwy[]-7*f

'C3531

"

,

Pk9i--;5

1

~CDRZOb>5V

6`11'

-

ff(QhJ*

htlas

.6X5V

e

-

7

DC

.T

­;$CDC%EEAeMIZI'

3-

fi

i

*To

(Itz-i1flw

L

WE

)~t,tA

;t-n

502

.6Q99

.

(div)

It23V-CI-,

~

L,11-

X

VOLTS/DIV

(2-H

.

A

I

~i~C

.CDC-GND-AC,7-f

.C)7k

®)

.

I~)AOAF**

IIM;?

iL-

VOLTS/

I~.TIr

;,3~;LPGND

t'

mommom

mmmommomom

!!

""""

;

2-4®

Jl*1t1£(

AI1it

C~Iio

o

SLUITo

WF4%E=A

-qk1;tlt_Mleft7~,

:MT$MhFDC7lffiK0)M1t

tlt--*--LE

t

VOLTS/DIV7-f

h

.

at

-

Lff,F(div)

YE,

hl

1-6~-,

7) ,4.6div

(2-4®),

Cz

t~)

JL`

XjE'tXVOLTS/DIVAMA-

"

TJ1000-19

i90~11MM

o

-f

t~CII
I~q

I

t}f~~,,

17'JiF"

*Al

7tT3ta=I

.

e

CP

.

.

DC-GND-ACA-f

l~~J~

-f

-,

9*--eDCIL-t,;,h

td~KTi~

divZ01h11'a

T

4

Tatoo

-z4k-utzogtr3! Y o

2.fA~'

GND-ACX

I

LGNDfL~

3.V~t

SECONDS/DIV-7

4

M`1C$M

AAAL

5

6

~C7k'TG~99

-POSITION

:Il,;KT1

7 9Iz

iiIcW

1

:5Mh'1~V

14Z

-f

+itaL`

~1

T

Lt~~tiI

tli

IL-*&t-U'I

Ilk>5>ttcL`ZTLtL`,

A

*YACJt5I

.

y-5F*DCIZtvhL,,

.+1

.~$C~fi

l,-l-~ro

3~Z~s,,4ZLN

t~.1

2-4®TIC,

a

ILVOLTS/DIV

'?BRE

T

7

~

~7

-

1

-

r-

li,<Ji

:RXZ

i

F

o

-

XfJ

-f ,,

.

%Ix

'

04ME=4

141MM11MAt1M

eFC2

LIT

.

.6X

;

P~CP~P~~(f~

1

.

l

e

VOLTS/DIV,7

pig

U'

n

°

IcW&Z-

:

5

2

.

3

.

j*IZSECONDS/DIVA

9

u

11"o

V~t

Ut-

-

WaUAIMACMIr-8div

C1divTl

4.fgItjPOSITION=i

5

.

*-TL

POSITION

Q9C(P5~SdivaF~

6

,ePc~

tJ:$C7k'T~~~t&t1

/DIV=ah

(+1)

X2V

-fi~

T04~tL3-t

-f

lL

a

=1

lLts-11',

A)

ttJ

3,Ir-M~,--LL,

Z*J4div

IL

h'J#"

5

FbA6,

4

-

i=

3

>5~~

h

o-ivt~OLZ,

1-

v-~(

.

h

tp

Q

h

AClf--itDCM

C

eF

b>AET

=1

t-DL

2

~'0

L

z,

04PUMZA

uIRSECONDS

'o

ffiIL~

eFv

tAL`#m

-

5CU-M)

P~

tl

:

t

tl

-

Japanese

2-1

0

ADDAPR

1982





















r~u~r~

1

MMMMMIMEMM

7

.7

-r-f

0)mAc5-

$J.WAXIMECYMbi

.

10-C.Mh

~r-

b

;

o

.

lms

t}C'CD

04NrfuN=

;tlt--f_6I-ftA1-3

-4It

04rlu

-'fd

;

b

S84WPa9NIJ

E

4

jr-RE'

7k*$M(div)

5X0.lms

'Zl4

I-ro

Im

I

I

2-5121

ti,

1

:

-

.*-

6

tlt:

5div

0.5ms

~~

WFA

lF

ff

.A

MLWA

**low

*10OMWAX

9j<llOFF

fiy

L,

-0-

SECONDS/DIV,z

;U0jiL

(2-5®)

XSECONDS/DIVAR~tf&

j

-11-a

~_-fdh

0

~

11

Mr

I
1

11
1

TIME/DIV

,

IZfS

M

T

TJ1000-20

6

3,C

OperatingInstructions-SC

2-5®lZTI,t"

J

.

3'L~

IJ

~M~1~

If
IZc$

3

~f

r

iFv

*WR29

7

,f

re

~_-RLZ

SECONDS/DIV

~~C

1,-11r0

1~

h

0

7~IZ

i

*

9-t

3.APPOSITION=

4

2-9­6F_hCl0%

5.7k-~z

6

7

.YL,CVOLTS/DIVA-f

L,

-,

',

e

I

CPTTIZ*3J

.

1,

-1T

#,

1

.I1'o

POSITION

.

lo%

.-cT

r

5

ARZfA~*L~

IRL

.

--

.~L

~

-,?

(2

.so%

4-

El

L90%

.

-6®VfK

:3a

6

T&M

:

frM

I

.II-

CA~144

=iiF

Fv-

-11'o

WM0

.5msCfR-3-CWi

IlX97t1,)

I

37~-'I

:

LCR75>,

,

W~Clo%

;,

.

v

-~~

a

F

5IZU-11'o

I*IZSECONDS/DIV-7-f

v

-jV

C('~C~k

.)L

.b~tQ!EMMlZ

UtZ$BPSIZ,

:

5L-

5F~

L

p1VVOLTS/DIV

[a1

U-C,

1,Z',

eQ

~~Rt

SECONDS/DIV_7

2

3rS

L_90%LCW

R}f

:C10

~1h-

.4x'tLtti-

(Il

ACi

y

%

o

C

L

,

1

502

,

A

~

O

3

-f

A192WE

Yo

f~~EY7IZC

~~8~~~~

&C1

1.4111ZM6j]UtzJt

ITo

ADD

(~~)

5IZJ0f1FUTTtL1o

APR

1982

h~~t~

CJ23Glz

.3fA~Cf~r~~S1I~,

Y o

7IZ~~C1

-9--f

1-H'-f

7)L

.CfMM~6(~Jh

~JJVC

ommommomm

ZZMERNE

100%

ENFAMEM

Effimmmommom
MAEEMEEM

0%

o--

t

mmummom
EMEMEEMMEM

2-6®

~

.t~1

W

MEM

1~~17E

TJ1000-37

Japanese

2-11



























Operating

.

1%
/DIV,-',,f-; ;

or,=MR0A

Instructions-SC

10%A;~-90%

X7)11,usIL

WAMW

(A-h-h04M)

A

=7K1-M

4k6t.t:0It.ft7~,

A~hn0=

-t~

SAC

RMNOAM

AIrtre&Ic~T,L,-11-

film

ILWtLI1ro

2.MODE,7

i~soZ,

f9N9~Cf-19{L{1CHOP,

WaU6±4,us

h

-f

502

~-CDPU0D7k-~Z$gOb,4div,

,'t

'IT

4X1

.

v

~F;~-

tWZO3

v

,,x

"

:2~

h

(div)XSECONDS/DIV

I'6L

us

Z

OHOPXL1ALT

L

Pa9

'o

AWi9ZfXS'{LIlALTjZW

SECONDS

LIto

b~

l

-

ro

ILLI-~ro

RXfln

;Cf*IL

-

1

&ZL

~c9ltd

T

~

I*{L,

8

9

"

k5ILLIIr

10

o)7k-~ZA>YFi~

11

flL;i-

2

SECONDS/DIV

*-{POSITION:3ih

.

*W-

POSITION

.

.

~Fti

.

Lt:21

NJ

Z

Au-1-ro

mommmmmmmm
mmmmmummon

SO%

V

n1L

tKol

mmmmmmmmmm
rnmrummrmnm

~~~s=Z~

"

I"I"im

.

6[~1

i"m

7

-f

OSE~L,

hI1-o

oDfAf

-1-i,

(2

{L,

SECONDS/DIV

n

.

>*

""

-7®Vf)

l

Mommm"m

v-wtp~1LZ,

~ta-t)L

(am-)

i~m

,

20DeFLODM

i$c3f:(I

n

.

2

-

AtMf-

L~~

F

.i-

teOHI

o

~'

4

.

IL#~~

nL>gm"rlu~t

LI-ro

5.fAr

zTt;oo

6.C4div0DtzTb~f44

-

.

W

X

1

~~

ZL-1$o

°-~~'

fi

:34

7

5+{L,

1tfAF3

fA~I~~~a~El`7IL1~fA~{LSG17li

~

1tzn

o~

f

ILI,jK&0DofX0D04IL~9*

A

;tl3.t5

1

-

ILVOLTS/DIV

~-0H2

;

o-ref

4

t~

L

7,4,~

2-7®270itlbTN011lMAJM

04.SECONDS/DIV
7k-TL$R

&CDA;il

b>,

fL-1-1

iW9R41M=SECONDS/DIV

~.k.htit:04

jWLE04Pa9=50,us

-

!rtrbSfl4M9Et1200,uszl-,

x

-fv3r-b,50ps

4div&;BLL11"o

14-

o

~ftAl'

X

4

i

t-*

a

*

3

FA

404

iLR7ttt'1.,&3~M0

5ZWX*'~(div)

TJ1878-3

Japanese

2-12

ADDAPR

1982





































2

W*a>YNSAV

(

-

a7

l~~T

'~tC2fA~'~a90~fJt xt

7

:~

T1.

OD)~fERRJ

mItVAIM

1 .

$A)J~-~

C-

11m

:

T-

t--IlDCfZZIr-Wt

2.VERT

ICA

I, -

Lt

6

"

0

3

.F 9

t1

CHIIL

.3

4

.

3Ir-jjt,

cftfT

5

.

If

mAt'1

6.CH

MODE,7

.Z,~

5

CHOP

Z6

"

1:1-,

"

)v

UCH21t

jMLBqraUOD*L0n

,

L

t

,

.

l'r,

I~-CH2CVOLTS/DIV7

zfiilf

1r-/

I,

-f

r

-3F-

U

I

i!

~Z

11'

;5--

. :

.-

4-ACDC-GND-AC,7-f

,-l-~',

LlfEWiVCfA-

l.<IJ:fE-AAf'F~-

~

-f

,~

:&Z

,2

C

1-3

L

r

,

CHOPItz

tr-

ALT

.

fl

u

5F+

biz

ItALTM&Z

F

CIMe

F 9

iLAfJ

a4

L~

I'~r

e

AC-1

v5F~

;

&JAWRM~

.

i

:

Vf_F

7imT~

W1;

.

;'wlt

,T--

;

:ti-fo-7,e

kcODfl4Illft&ODotX'ZA

-f

v

-3-

L, CHIL

CH2

OperatingInstructions-SC

ll

~i+i

I

o

mmumim

.t

Sri*1-2

F

INE

OEM

502

mWaSEEMEME
MEMOW,ENN

L

IN,

-g®Vf)

MEMMEWWWOM

"

t

**AW0

1

.

6div,

8

2-8®

W

EME

Divisions

(360°)

1*b

-i

241AXIE

45°/divTJ53LL

;

E

""

1

i

I

TJ1878-4

-1 -4 -

(2

ILt~

7,

.t

J

t

5M(,IT,

~

-(

div

t6

DS/DIVX-f

8.CHI
HC~

9.-

4'

(-3r

CD

rig,

CD

1div11,1

45°/div)

10
11

tJ

:fzmr

LCH2CPOSITION

I~1'6

L

IT

.

g3lrzSECONDS/DIV=>Fo-)L,~O

a*,,L1)

- ,

SJ:

5

E8div

CD

6--

1-tt

c~bb3

-H'-f'lA.C45°-t,rzbl,S1',(360°=8div

X51*1145°/divC

.
.

AIMLt--

;

EP

(div)

YON

iq-111',

lL45°/div

-f

4Ab>,

Jt

:~ F

:3

5IZ1,11

iz

:~fJ

p-w

M1

(~

1*tr-,

;~-l~t-DZ,

LM9CH

-

(2-8®)

c

.f

1*)

SECON-

LT,

AMM

z

~"

Iel*LZ,

X

7`

,

Nq

-3.

cfmws~mt,

W

~",

A/div)

i

X10

F

o

SwP

-)LC

=7}C

1~1;tLt:.

eF

H

,

=

b

~

.

UM71=0

MM21U27°

'51*~A

(div)

f

.

6X45*

-Cl-

141if(~VSECONDS/DIV=7

<

Wl*~f%-rt

MAGI

-f~9~

to#UM-r3t:L.Z-

1E

2-9®1t2-

-f .,

X"

(ft/div)

5r-

teX101c

8®~rJI

fNflX=7k't'~

1145°=10=4.5'/d ivLtr

;

:

f4-

-

~

zTb

(div)

,

X10

,

X#J-,;k

SWP

ct

W--W

h-',

MAGA

ADD

APR

1982

-

.

k6tlt--1AfeftJ~1-3

Mfg=

JM~~1127°

6

X4.5°

Z1-,

L

.

Japanese

2-13





Operating

Instruction

~r:e4LA

(#ER)

:--SC

.

502

t

EMEMEMMEMM
!,ammo/mom/

mom

"

am'"_
Em,\mom_mom
momm'®!e

MOMMEMEME

mommommom

A31*M11L&XOMRSOlIM

2-!

"

:

.*X

f

v

2

"
"

TJ18785

t-lq---)TM500

CD

-f3Y4

TM500%9-

~

-xa~c

1)

:-b;

"lAlT*fS<1-3zt

;*f#o$M*6"afo

it, 4~

-f9

t't

;reCRT

T-r

*II'o

~~-z"%tr

Pau

*t"o

Japanese

2-14

ADD

APR

1982

WARNING

THE

AREFORUSE
ONLY
PERFORM
CONTAINED
UNLESS
REFER

AND

PERFORMING

FOLLOWING

.TO

SERVICE

AVOID

ANY

YOU

TO

OPERATORS

BY

PERSONAL

SERVICING

IN

OPERATING

ARE

SAFETY

ANY

SERVICE

SERVICING

QUALIFIED

QUALIFIED

SUMMARY

INJURY,

OTHER

SAFETY

.

INSTRUCTIONS

PERSONNEL

DO

THAN

INSTRUCTIONS

TODO

SUMMARY

PRIOR

THAT

NOT

SO

TO

.

Section

3-SC

502

DIAGRAM

The

vertical

amplification
the

vertical

amplifier

circuit,

triggering

Input

maybecapacitively
or
selected

S100issettoDC,
the

the
and
component
ground

without the
input

circuitry

which

signal

Where
channel1willbedescribed

Signals applied

Assuming

both channels1and2are

Coupling

internally

by S100atthe

attenuators.When
circuittocouple

highertothe

referenceisprovidedtothe

connector

amplifier

for

the

vertical

deflection

includes

allows

.

to

coupled

disconnected

thatasignalisapplied to

the applied

signalsofabout

attenuator

signal.When

of

the

needtoremove

.

THEORY

provides
signal

beforeitis

platesofthe

the

delay

line

oscilloscope

the

TE

NO

.

the

front-panel

(AC),

directly

(GND).Input

input

for

channel1.

signalispassed

S100issettoAC,

.

This capacitorblocks

S100issettoGND,

inputofthe

the applied

O

F

&

O

O

Vertical

attenuation

crt.The

trigger

and

to

similar,

input

connectors

coupled

coupling

the

input,

C100

is

10Hz(-3dBpoint)

signal

applied

vertical

display

only

(DC),

when

directly

placed

any

amplifier
from

and

to

view

its

is

to

in

do

the

OPERATION

CIRCUIT

Amplifier

In

additiontoproviding

frequencies

instrument,
inputrccharacteristic(1MO

Preamplifier

The

amplifiers,
3-1

showsasimplified

a

within

the

preamplifier consists

connectedina

Gain

VOLTS/DIV

DESCRIPTION

constant

the

bandwidth

input

attenuator

Stage

differential

block

Differential

Signal

Current

Setting

Resistor

Selected by

Switch

100X

attenuation

capabilities

maintains a constant

paralleledbyabout47pF)

two

identical

of

configuration

the

diagram

Supply

of

preamplifer

at

of

operational

.

all

the

Fig

.

.

.

When

do

coupling,

GND

while

when

voltage

coupling
amplifier

Input

Attenuator

The

input attenuatorisa

voltage

0.5to20of

frequency

(attenuation

REVDAPR

divider

levels

the

AC-GND-DC

input

levels

capacitor

.

and

VOLTS/DIV

the

signals,

ratio

1980

NO

(above10V)

connections

are

changed

to

charge

provides

the

dividerisessentially

determined

TE

aretobe

switch

are

without

frequency-compensated

100X

switch.At do
by the

blockedbyac

shouldbeset

made

This

.

attenuationinpositions

broken,

or

will

overdriving

and

resistance

to
or

allowthe

the

for

resistive

ratio)

low

.

Fig.3-1.Input
current

paths

prearnpliflerdetailed

.

block

supply

diagrmn

1878-17A

showing

signal

Theory

of

Operation-SC

502

The

operational

0150

and

0160

on

the other
follower
gain

the

paralleledbyR164,
pathinFig.3-1)

quiescently
thereisno
Whenasignal

currentisdeveloped

input

the stageisdeterminedbythe

of

two

sidesofthe

Correct

adjustmentofthe

balance
current

amplifiers

on

one

side,

side.0125A

output

to

R177,

.

the

through

appliedtothe gateof0125A

is

through

are

and

012513,

and

012513

transistors
amplifier,

and

R180

Step

two

sidesofthe

the

gain-setting

the

composed

0160

and

Bal

DIAGRAM

Gain

Stage

The

differential

0160

and

0175ispassed

and

0325totheoutput

are

0325
amplifier.0320

channel
and

Channel

The
gotothe
output

The

forward

positive
lows
operateina
describedindetail

Channel1MODE
switchtoCH1placesalowatpin3of
chop

flop

at

pin8of
The
The
0335

through
split
each
unused

also

switch

0345

.

Switch

outputsofthe

channel

amplifierisdetermined

MODE

biasing
logic

(0).Since

multivibrator

U360.The

U360,

remaining

signal

from

the

to

0415

equallybyR427-R425

sideofthe

channel

signal

developedatthe

through

amplifier

the lower

and

0325

loads

switch

switch

selected

which

the

different

similar

manner,

.

and

lowatthe

turningon0330,0335,

channel

channel1is

delay

line.The

and

0410,

delay

and

halfofa

provide

and

trigger

channel1and

where

S300

controls

transistors.Table

transistor

positionsofthe

only the

switch operation

lowatpins

a

CLR

switch

the

line.Summing

applying

emitter

channel

current

signal amplifier

channel2gain

signal that

the

.

the

willbeturned

2, 3,4and5of

inputofU360

transistors

passed

channel2signalispassed

currents

(Diagram

them

equallytoeach

0125A,

of

0170

and

provideavoltage

and

0175.Total

resistance

R162

(the

control,

amplifiersothat

gain-setting

between

and

signal

R135

resistor(s)

the

resistor

O

Vertical

collectors

followers

switch.0320

push-pull

channel

CH1position

.

Setting

U355

0415

through

are

4)
the

cascode

gaintodrivethe

goestothe

switch by

3-1

shows

on by

MODE

the

disabling

J-K

i

results

and

are biased

0330

summed

and

applied

currentofthe

0175

R175,

current

will

signal

CIRCUIT

of

0320

and

0340

stages

in

the

switch

will

be

MODE

the

flip-

nalow

0410

off

and

then

to

side

of

R130-R150.Conductionof0160

the

amountofthis

across
The

switch,

factors

balancedatequal
gain-setting

VOLTS/DIV

.

adjusting
while

R162

and

valueofR130-R150

S150,todetermine

To

minimize

are

rotating

trace

selected,

resistorsisnear zeroatall
switch.This

Step

Bal

the

DESCRIPTION

Amplifier

the delay

input
TRIGGER

MODE

CH1minus

outputiscontrolled
positionofthe

disconnected
U35513)
signalissupplied

12)
chop
channel

chop

.

chop-switching

.

MODE
to
inputofU360

line

supplies

current,

Swit

1

CH
CH

2

Chop

multivibration

producesa250

inputofU360

output

switch output

outputtothe blanking

Alternate

switch,

the clock

VIEW

CHANNEL

ch

2!Low

CH

MODE

from

theclock

to

transients

mode

a pulseatthe

(pin

causes

independent

switch

Low

High

12)

and

0175ischanged

current,

R175.The

potentials

control

VOLTS/DIV

U360
Pin 8

ground

via

and

operation.In

developing

outputisa

is

selected

the

gain

shiftasdifferent

0125A

the

theoutput

positions

Table

SWITCH

(0)

(1)

(0)

operation

the

by

switch

NAND

also
inputofU360isusedtoswitch the

between

inputofU360.The

the

and

that

so

do

balancingisachieved

R135

switch

of either

3-1

LOGICTABLE

Output

U360
Pin 6

High

Low

High

MODE

pins3and9of

and

the

kHz

square-wave

gate

the blanking

to

circuitisusedtoblank the

.

endofeach

channel

the output

push-pull

by the

.

vertical

012513

sources

thevoltageacross the

settingsofthe

fornotrace

from0.2Vto

amplifier

.

(1)

(0)

(1)

The

.

U355C

channels1and2.

the

with

the

Level

U355

Pin 12

High

(1)Low(0)

High

(1)

Low

(0)

chop

switch.In

multivibrator

to

ALT

positionofthe
sweepissupplied
pulse

switchtochange

voltage

signal

VOLTS/DIV

deflection

aredo

movement

1mV.

aconstant

MODE

U355

Pin 13

High

(1)
(1)

High

multivibrator

the

CHOP

U355

are

(U355A-

signal.This

the clock

circuit.The

to

the

(pin

The

clock

the

by

.

by

or

3-

2

REVBAPR

1980



input

channel

endofeach

the

Trigger

Trigger

signal

from

Delay

Line

Delay

for

the

vertical signal,
circuits
reaches

the
originated
ing

timetoinitiateasweep

the

instrument

.

thatisconnectedtothe output

sweep

.

Amplifier

amplifier

the

0340

vertical

and

0345

preamplifier

DIAGRAM

Line

DL400

vertical

display

the

trigger

provides

which

deflection

pulse

the

approximately

allows

before

plates

leading

when

amplifies

and

suppliesitto

Vertical

140nsdelay

the

sweep

the

vertical

the

crt.This

of

edgeofthe

using

internal trigger-

amplifier

the

4O

at

output

the

CIRCUIT

appropriate

usedasatriggering

The

channel

auxiliary

an

connectionsofthe

DESCRIPTION

Amplifier&Trigger

0470.R461,

generator

signal

lets

signal

that

controlling
of

Q465

networks

rc
optimize

high-frequency
amplifier

the

and

amplifier

speed

signal

1

trigger

trigger

amplifier

amplifier

View

R460

and

R470

signal

degeneration

Variable

0460

.

provide

high-frequency

frequencyresponse

peaking

.

TheoryofOperation-SC

trigger pickoff

sourceforthat

also

supplies

.

set

the

gainofthe stage

between

capacitor

coils

to

C474

provide

.

circuit

vertical

the

the

and

compensation
L470

and

502

to be

channel

signal to

by

emitters

the

series

to

L475

are

additional

.

Output

amplifiertoprovidealow
terminatethe delay

the delay

amplifier

Q455

Q465

Amplifier

and

Q450

line

and

and

0460compose

that

drives

are

line.It

the

following

the output

connected

input

also

an emitter-coupled

as a

impedance

provides

stages

power

amplifiers

common-base

to

isolation

.

properly
between

push-pull
Q475

and

Trigger

output
the

switchisdepressed, the
channelissummed
applied

triggering
delay
displayed as the

View

Trigger view

signal

from

TRIGGER

each

to

signalisapplied

line.The

amplifier

the

VIEW

switch.When

and

sideofthe

trigger

vertical

0440

trigger

comparator

vertical

equallybyR427-R425

split

delay

differentially

signalisnow

signal

and

signal

line.At

.

the

0435

and

TRIGGER

from

the

toeach

amplified

amplify

supplyitto

each

vertical

same

time

sideofthe

the

VIEW

and

the

and

REV

B

APR

1980

3-3



Theory

The

also
level

trigger
a

sampleofthe

sampleofthe

The
the
either

deflection

EXT
voltage applied
this circuit

Trigger

The

appliedtothegate

Q520A
signal

provides

and

current
temperature
voltage-to-current

match
from

horizontal
the

in

.

Trigger

The

the

emitterofcommon

input

COUPLING

0510.The

(0555,

comparator

trigger

R560.If

higher,

is

Q580ishigh.The

0575islower

of

the

U595

Trigger

AUTO

Operation-SC

of

trigger

selects

necessarytomatch

signals.Input

trigger

sweep

from

TRIG

EXT

andalow

the

that of

common

front-panel

SOURCE

impedance.The

trigger

andtothe

trigger

pickoff

and

amplifies

signal

power

generator

generator.These

the

internal

system, an

input

connector, or a

tothe

to select

Pickoff

TRIG

which

provides

isolation
base

of

source

compensation

the other

base

amplifier.R518

EXT

Generator

outputofthe

pushbutton

pushbutton

outputofQ510

0550

Q565,

(Q580

comparatorisfrom

the

voltageatthe

current

(the

comparator

trigger

Level

mode

502

DIAGRAM

Trigger

selects

signal

applied
line

instrument.Controls areprovided

trigger

signal

field

of

impedancetothe

between

Q525

for

converter

amplifier

SOURCE

trigger

base

and

and

flows

oppositeistrueifthe

collector

Control.The

pushbutton

the

internal

the

external

the

current

for

the

Channel

to

voltageoran

produces

trigger

trigger

external

from

a high

as

Q520A.Q520B

triggering

amplifier

outputof0500

Q575).The

trigger

through

view

signal
signal
sample

level,

thefront-panel

effect

transistor

input

the

Ext Horiz

wellasactingasa

for

0520A.0525

whose

0530

supplies

pushbuttonisnot

pickoff,

switches,isappliedtothe

switches

goes

to

Q560)

and

the

triggering

comparator

0575

0580islow).Both

of

are

suppliedtogate generator

amplifier

triggering

pushed

trigger

trigger

levelofthe

trigger pickoffiseither

1,orChannel2,a

external

trigger

slope,

current

0500

the

pulsestostart

pulses

from

connected

the

of

and

sourcefollower

impedance

baseof0525

Bal

control,

also

output

sources.The

is

supplied

for

whichisselected

to provide a

passes

emitter

to

trigger

alsotothe

other input

LEVEL

and

the

base

Q440

level,

in,iscontrolled

O5

CIRCUIT

Pickoff

signal.It

signal

tothe

internal

signal

are derived
the

vertical

to the

power

line

coupling

connector

current

0525when

through

level

baseofQ575

collector

and

for

0520B

.

R535

constant

provides

forms

output

to the

pushed

follower

circuit

trigger

to

control,

voltage

outputs

0435

with the

.

the

will

low

the

the

.

by

in

of
of

.

DESCRIPTION

Generator

and

by the
basesof0555

emitter
and
signal.C567ischargedina
negative
capacitors,
the

0550
tobeadjusted

the
signal

control

is

the output
waveform

pin1connectedtoground(+

waveform

a

(output)torise
about

conditions.The
are
SLOPE)

negative
signal

that

(about+4.2
gate generator

the

availableatthe
drivers

24Bofthe
enablesline
Gate

connector.0625
to selectaninternal
sweep

Auxiliary

suppliedtocommon

input
connectedtopin

triggering

Assume

triggering

most

With

Gate

within

Ifitis

A

a

follower

charge

after

holdoff

sampleofthe

C552tothe

levelofthe

C552-C567,

and

Q560.This

negative

.

the

AUTO

limits

generator,

signals

whichisused

(3 to4V)

3.2V.Pin 14isnegative
about20mV

causes

going

from

the

completionofthe

V) during the

time.The

U600B

desiredtoover-ride

rear

and

Ext

generator

Trigger

impedance

signal,

and

+

input

Q555,

LEVEL
between

and

pushbutton

are

setbyR556-R558

from

about4.1Vand

to

output gate

gate outputatpins3and4when

a

and
sweep

until

rear

and

interface

receiv er

Gate

and

.

and

28Bonthe

applied

0565

.

signal.This

causes

peak

input

set
control
allows

the

two

most

integrated

the

for

sweep

theICinput

on

of

pin 14

generatorissupplied

holdoff

these

pins

triggered

interface

U6000

.

connectorisgrounded.This

U600Atosupply

input

signals

0630

external

or

Amplifier

channel1preamplifier

base

amplifier

isolation.The

simultaneouslytothe

signal,

the

emitter

positive

similar

signal.The

the

voltage

(R560)

the

triggering

voltage

positive

out,

the

and

circuit

trigger

each

sweep,

control

comparatortoa

generator

SLOPE),

(pin13)

pin 4

going under

occurs

positive

when

other

pins6and

time.This

droptoabout3.2Vafter

gate

connector

the gate

from

the

gate as the

0540

rear

interface

coupledthrough

voltagetorise

levelofthe

mannertothe

peak-sensing

levels

applied

via

emitter

levels

peaksofthe

triggering

(IC),

(output) to

.

Floating

going.The

outputofU595,

the

the

diode

outputof0540

followers

LEVEL

representing

R568-R569

U595

control

a

positive

causes

the

pins

13

to

10

inhibits

and

holdoff

through

substitute

rear

interface

switch
inputtothe

output

to provide a

connector

input

peak

to

control

trigger

LEVEL

.

converts

gate

.

With

going

pin

drop

to

above

and

14

pin1(-

pin13is

holdoff

U595

so

are

high

the

are

line

pin
Ext

used

signal

low

.

3

is
is

3-4

REVC

APR

1980



DIAGRAM

Sweep

Sweep

sweep
of
gates

determined
negative-going
wave
the
from

positive.Eitherapositive signalatthe
negative
collector
flow
supplies

allows

to+5V
AUTO
armed,

READY
occurs
limits

the
through

amplifier

RESET

buttonisheldin(closed)toprevent
triggering

Control

U650,

with

additional external

generator.In

U650isgrounded

from

the

trigger

byR664

square-wave.This

from

pin3drives

sweep

operatesinthe

the

trigger

signalatthe

currentofthe constant

through

In

the

When

voltageisabout

0660,

currenttounblank

the

sweep

single

sweep

and

pin19mustbeungrounded

trigger

pins

indicatortolight.This

when

the

button.The

mode

7

and

the

LED

current

pin18is

at

action

SECOND/DIV

the

sweepinthe

the

automatic

If

pin

.

and

generator

thus

generatortorun

11 of

sweepisin

about+4V,the

0V,the

the

1ofU650

generator

C662,

circuitryinU650

the

base

triggered

drives

baseof0660

turning

the

crt,

mode,

pin12of

pushbutton.When

U650

actionatpins7and11also

the

.

sweepisenabled.This

anodeofCR649

switch

or,

sweepisdisabled

single

circuity,

triggering

foraperiodoftime

negative-going

Q660

of

modeapositive

will

current

off

0670.Q660turning
while

.

are

low,

triggered

sweep

through

transientsfrom

sweep

O6

CIRCUIT

Control

controls
mode,

receivesnotrigger

negative.When

the

base

baseof0670

cause

source

turning

U650isconnected

releasing

by

the

causing

mode.R643

is

disabled.When

from

the

CR648

when

the

mode

the

pin

outputs

square-

pulse

of

0670

or

the

entire

Q665

0670

the

sweep

TRIG'D

occurs

horizontal

and

the

RESET

falsely

.

19

to
on
off

is

DESCRIPTION

and

Generator

Sweep

off.When
off.The

timing

a

amplifier
ramp

determinedbythetiming
tion,

a

current
exceeds

forcedtoretrace.As
Q680
equal the
integrator

The
0690B

the
connector

(Schematic
16

of
circuit
channel
each

Generator

The

sweep

current

capacitor

(0690A,

.

The

untilitreaches approximately+6.9

At

the

through

the

and

Swp

Offset

so

The

outputofthe

horizontal

through

the

holdoff,

throughcomparator

switch

sweep

rampisgenerated

0670isoff,

from

the

due

0690B,

positive

endofthe

timing

CR675

timing

output

the

through

3),

comparator

.

going

sweep,

Q675

resistor

turnon.

resistor

0Vuntil

to

control,

gateofQ690A

sweep

preamplifier,

emitter

sweep

and

the

change

to

HORIZONTAL

Theory

transistors

timing

to

the

and

ramp

resistor

0670isturned

and

0685

current,

the

sweep

This

causes

current,

the

R681

adjusts

is

generator

pin

followers

control integrated

0310

and

channel

0310

the

input

Operation-SC

of

during the time

0685

resistor

actionofthe

Q695)

creating

now

and

capacitor

When

.

the

ramp

the

thus

startofthe

the

at0V

.

goesto:

18Aofthe

0315
switch

and

channelatthe

AMPLIFIER

0670

and

nowflows

runs

V

.

the

sweep

drops

0685

clamping

drain

0310

circuit

to signal

alternate

0315tocause

will

0675

intothe

operational

the

sweep

upata

combina-

forcing

on

0685

current

ramp

below0V,

current

next

sweep

current

input

the

interface

rear

and

U650

the

end

502

is

be

rate

is

to

the

.

of

of

0300

pin

start

mode

the

of

A

holdoff
connectstothe
tionofsweep

a

single
peakofthe
circuitstoreturn
before

the

connectedtopin8of
They

are
SECONDS/DIV
U650

reaches

0655

-5Vsupply

REVBAPR

waveform

trigger

gating

sweep

has

sweep

next

sweep

determined

switch.Holdoff

about2.4V.

actsasan

.

1980

ramp.Itisnecessary

is

availableatpin

generator

waveforms

occurred.Holdoff time beginsatthe

completely

starts.The

U650

by the

emitter

preventing

during

to quiescent

capacitors

determine

sweep

time

follower

holdoff
toallowthesweep

the

rate

starts

andaregulator

17

which

the

genera-

times

after

conditions

and

resistors

holdoff

settingofthe

when

time

pin 16

for

.

of

a

Preamplifier

When

the

position,
amplified
provides
suppliedtothe
The

MAG
resistor.The
positions
0720
reaching

outputofthe

the
low

gainof0700

switch

also
prevent the

to

the output

In

the

AMP

by

SECONDS/DIV

sweep

external horizontal

ramp

common

input

impedanceand

inputofthe

determined

is

which

controls

SECONDS/DIV

forward

amplifier

positionofthe

switchisinasweep

from

base

horizontal

the
switch

biases

external horizontal

.

SECONDS/DIV

the

sweep

amplifier

isolation

output

bythe

positionoftheSWP

sizeofthe

in

the

0715

and

signal

from

rate

generator

0700,

reverse biases

.Itis

amplifier

collector

sweep

signal

switch,

the

trigger

which

then

rate

from

the

3-

is

.

5

TheoryofOperation-SC

pickoff
providesalow

signal.The

collector
control

AMP

amplifiedbycommon

is

input

gainof0720

resistor,

R723

and

R725.The

position

also

impedance

which

causes

502

base

amplifier

and

isolation

determinedbythe

is

includes

SECONDS/DIV

Q710tobe

the Ext Horiz

forward

0720.0720

fortheinput

sizeofthe

Gain

in

switch

biased

the

and

0700tobe
reaching

The

POSITION
current
current

source

being

reversebiasedtoprevent

the output

transistor

fedtothe

amplifier

controlisconnected

.

0730,

inputofthe

whose

the

output

output

sweep

to

rampfrom

the

base

adjusts

amplifier

of

the

.

Output
preamplifierisapplied
comprise

current

the
Centering

for

differential
Sweep
horizontal

compensation

Transistors

are

connected

Amplifier.The

emitter

an

source

control,

unbalanceinthe

Gain

control,

amplifier.R750

for

Q775-0780-0785and
as

coupled

R760

the

two

DIAGRAM

output

tothe

base

paraphase

for

the

paraphase

providesameans

R770

sets

and

paraphase

separate

DIAGRAM

O7CIRCUIT

Horizontal

of

the

0745.0745

of

amplifier.0755

amplifier.The

of

amplifierorcrt,

the

overall

R764

amplifier

current-driven

Z-Axis

gainofthe

provide thermal

stage

0770-0795-0790

Amplifier

horizontal

and

Q765

correcting

while

the

.

feedback

CIRCUIT

Amplifier

amplifiers.Input

amplifier)isan
positive-going

is

right
negative-going

output
input
networks

C776,
amplifier

and

DESCRIPTION

signals,

output

Negative

amplifier)

signal

feedbackisprovided

transistors

transistors

C773-R773and C785-R789.Capacitors

and

C791

response

DESCRIPTION

Crt

Circuit

transistor

NPN

response

0780-0785-0795-0790

0775

are

speed-up

fast

to

0775
transistor
while

input

a

PNP

is

.

and

0770

capacitors

changes

for

(in

the

better

transistor

transistor

the

from

to

through

to

.

left

output

response

Q770

(in

for

better

collectors

the

base

feedback

C775,

improve

to

the

of
of

the

The

crt
provides
cathode-ray
amplifier
sion,

Z-Axis

feedback
amplifier

pathisfrom

to

are
amplifier

consuming
pull-up
sistor
amplifier

intensity

3-

since

The

the

summing

connected

6

the

Amplifier

Z-Axis

consistsofQ835,

transistor

for

circuit

produces

control

tube

(crt).The

circuits

operational

that

provides

level

are

they

set

amplifierisa

0845-0840

the

pointatthe

as a

providesafast

minimum

and

the

amplifier

through

the

high

circuits

the

the

necessaryfor

Z-Axis

included

amplifier

collector-coupled

quiescent power,

0840

the

with

intensityofthe

current

with

0845,

and

collectors

baseof0835

linear

acts as

.

The

output voltage

drive

signal to

control-grid

voltage

amplifier

the

potentials

operation

and

crt

circuit

crt

display

driven,

voltage

a

0840.Thefeedback
through

output

the

output.The

C834-R834

.

0845

complementary

signal

0845

acts

pull-down
control

.

supply

and

of

Blanking

discus-

.

shunt-

and

0840
while

as the

tran-

from

the

the

the

crt

The

output voltage

determinedbythe

to the

voltage

(baseof0835).The
by

the
INTENSITY
current

Z-Axis

the
and

0830

signal

setting

voltage
levelatthe

Blanking

A

combinationoffour

output

unblanking,

sweep

ing

and

and

0805

levelatthe

input

current

control

limiting resistor

amplifierincaseofa

formacomparator

the

level

currentofthe

intensify

0830

at

baseof0825

Amplifier

form a

comparator

voltage

current
from

and

R841

reference

base

blanking

horizontal

from

pin

levelofthe

across

drop

summing

combinationoftwo

a

sweep

mustbemore

.

different

19Bofthe

point

through

blanking.CR841

actasa

level.To

circuit

protection

high-voltage

the

with

input
amplifier.These
amplifier

with

Z-Axis

R834

unblank

rear

amplifier

R834inreference

amplifier

forthe

is

determined

sources,

circuit

short.0825

sweep

positive

signals control

mode,

the

blanking

the

crt,

than the

signals

blank-

chop

interface.0800

baseof0805

REVCAPR

is

and

for

the

the

are

1980

:

Theory

Operation-SC

of

502

setatabout

negative

more
amplifier

All

the

base

amplifier
pedance
bias-setting

proximately5mA
while

the
about1mA
0820isabout0.3

High-Voltage

High-Voltage

their

with
and

the

T850

allows

sinusoidally
saturating

High-Voltage

following
sampling

and

comparingittoa+20.0V
junctionofR893C-R893D
nominally0V.If
negative,

becomes

U860
U860

to

resultsinincreasedcharging
cause

0855

increasing

begins
providing

ensure
its

most
C854ischarging,
most

negative

CR855

0860.0860's
0855,

thus

turning
with

its

the

energy

via

0850

has

been

base-emitter,
positive

+3.7V.The

than+3.7Vbeforeitcontrols

output

.

controlling

and

isolation

transistor

front-panel

through

associated

drivetoenergize

T800
while

switches

discussion

the-2kV

the

junction

positive.The

go

to

the

to

conduct,

positive

that

saturation

negative

and

turningonCR853

causing
offof0855isspeeded
one-turn

stored

and

CR850.0850

completely discharged.With0V

the

than the

input

0815,

which

from

0820.A

through

set

the

transistor

mA,

the

Regulator

Regulator.0860, 0855,

components

primary

allowing

.

Regulation.Refer

.

Regulation

across voltage

the

more

conduct

average

voltage.Duringthe

voltage,

conduction

winding.The

within

primaryofT800

input

kV

-2
R893C-R893D

of

positive,

outputofU860

longer

currenttoT800

T850

feedback

will

continue

then

the

at

C854

its

collectortogo

the

supply

input

intensify

signals

intensity

crt

winding

pass

providesalow

the

impedance-matching

0820

turns the

.Ifthe

beam

a resonant

0855

and

reference

wellaspin3of

as

supply should

causing
current

during

allows

from

its

time pin 5ofT800isat

starts

discharging,

to

provide

reduces

up by

current

now

coil

remains

voltage

signal

through

current

causes

willbeintensified

provide
(pins4and5)to

to

is

divider

ittosaturate

until

conduction

the

turnedonuntil

may

flow

crt

current

0850

the

transformer

Q850

to

Fig.3-2

accomplished

R893C-R893D

supply

become

and

hence

theoutput

going

for

C857,

each

cycle,

and

T850

one-turn

pin5of

base

base

more

positive

the

action

through

flows

through

across

now

.

must

the

blanking

common

input

of

beam

current

a

through

and

regulation

function

during

U860,

pin3of

(pin6)of

positive

which

thereby

.As0855

winding

T800

of

0855,

cuttingoff
current

current

of

T850

swing

im-

and

ap­off,

U860

T800

move

the

by

.

The
less

will

while

is at

The

.

T850

and
T800
T850

0850

more

go

of

.

as

is

to

its

to
of

Fig.3-2
high-voltage regulator

.

sinusoidally,
Duringthe
charging
with

again
on, the reference supply voltage

positive
(whichiscontrolledbyR860).Oncethe

becomes
the
short

pin

reference

IfaT800
will
divider

will

0860

High-Voltage

and
voltage

supplied
the
about3.3kVpeak
cathodeisalso
ding

and

Time

relationshipofwaveformsatthree

.

high

The

C857

voltageoftheone-turn

cause

slowly,

more

reference

should

F11

will

voltage

secondary

blow

to

or

turn

CR856

.

The

secondary

positive

for

Positive

by voltage

inputofU850

CR881

.
supplies

of

0

thus

setting

time

that

0855

a

voltage

to

0855toconduct.Initially

depending
positive

supplyisheldasa

occurtothe

move

toward

and

winding

protect

the

regulator

onto

Outputs

windingofT800

accelerating

the

control

accelerating

tripler

from

.

The

obtained

half-wave

the-2kVtothe

T800

than

consequently

Q855.If
remove

grid

voltage

causes

conditionsfor

not

was

upon

T800

circuit

potential
and

voltage

U850.The

the

from

rectifies

conducting,

level

which

feedback

the

+20V,CR862

constant

secondary,

zero,

thereby

short

remainsforati

the

R893C-R893D

should

the

base

heater

for

secondary

T800

for

the

the

the transformer output

cathode

crt

pointsinthe

its

voltages

conduction

when

winding

instrument

at

allowed

is

chargingrateofC870

voltage

conducts

+20.6V.If

the

reducing the

thetransformer

fail

R855

drive

from

the

voltage

the

crt

applied
crt

directly

secondary

.

the

crt,

provides

for

T800

to

U860

combined

T850

of

to

pin

at

voltage

me,

voltage

and

0855

negative
the

for

the

screen

voltage

winding

heated

vary

again

was

turn

move

drive

F800

R857

bias

crt

win-

.

will

F11
and

a

at

.

via

.

is

to

is

@

MAY

1980

3-7



TheoryofOperation-SC

Diodes

control
this

CR879
T800
control

bias voltage,

Axis
CR882isset

restorer

across
anodeofCR882

CRT

previously,

CR885

voltage

supplyissetbythe

and

CR882

secondary,

grid.CR879

depending

amplifier.The

by

and

CR884asa

R888

Control

In

addition

front-panel

equaltothe

CR884

and

for

the

clip

determine

to

limits

positive

the

Beam

.

Circuits

to

the

502

providethe

crt

control

Beam

the

upon

rectifier.This

INTENSITY

FOCUS

grid.The

adjustment

crt

grid bias

the

the

negative

the

output

clipping

adjustment.CR885

peak-to-peak

and

DIAGRAM

Low

Voltage

rectified

voltage

operating

excursion

voltage

levelatthe

resultsinadolevel

excursionatthe

control

internal

negative

level

output

R873.Diodes

from

levelatthe

of

cathode

as a

acts

discussed

astigmatism

9O

Power

of

the
the

of

the

Z-

of

de

CIRCUIT

Supplies

.

Geom

have been

crt

display.FOCUS

voltage

for

the

third

R899.In

both

the

adjustment

deflection

adjustment

coil

L895toalign

lines

.

FOCUS

controls
timum

correct
voltage

control
shape,

provide the proper

crt

horizontal
geometryofthe

permits
rotation
graticule

DESCRIPTION

and

incorporated

for

the

second

anodeisobtainedbyadjusting

ordertoobtain

and

electrostatic

R897

varies

plate

display.The

of

the

the

for

arrivingatan op-

control

Astic

shieldstocontrol

trace
do

R894

anodeinthe

optimum

controls

lens

configurationinthe

the

positive

rotation

current

display

through

with

Calibrator

provides

crt

.

size

spot

are

adj

levelonthe

the

control,
the

horizontal

Proper

Astig

and

usted

overall

R895,

beam-

the

to

-20VSupply
Power

for

the

-20Vregulatorissupplied

TM

500

Series

Power

Module
ly.The
operational

consistingof0960
in
R949,

R947
operational
about2.9
voltageisestablishedbycomparing
negative
the

negative
conduction
transistor to

power
asanoperational

backtoits
eventofa

current

biases

+20VSupply

Power

position

regulator

amplifier

the

power

module.The

R947

and

and

R945
amplifier.The

times

input

(pin2)of

and

module

negative

current

through

0960

Off

the

applies

input

positive

of

correct

off,

Circuit for

positive

The-20Vand

Placing

for

U950,

and

R945.R949isthe input

are the

by R947 (-20VAdjust)

(pin3).

inputstoU950

0960

for

NPN

series

amplifier

input.0955

overload.The

R943)

shutting

+20Vsupplies

MODE

+11.5V

the

-20Vsupply
and

the

NPN

gain

feedback

gainofthe

with

U950

Any

and

power

the output

pass

whose

will

cause

the

-20

switch

to the

-33

.5

transistor that

of

the

differences

transistor

protects

-20

are

V

and

(S300)inthe

negative

from

V

unregulated

consists

the

series

pass

located

is

the

amplifierisset

resistor,

resistors

amplifierisset

the

voltage

causeachange

module

error.0960

outputisconnected

the

overload

0955toturn

V

supply

similarinoperation

+20

inputofU930

for

The

.

voltageatthe

reference

between

series

and

are

connected

supplyinthe

(increase

on,

off

.

V

Supplies

PWR

the

supp-

stage

by

while

the

supply

the

in

the

pass

the

which

OFF

and

of

to

to
the outputofthe
0930

+11
0950

positive

-20

+5VSupply

at

TM
ly.The

operational

0970.The
the
supply
the

in

.

positive

positive
of
error

overload.The
will
the

the

baseof0930.The

+20

on,

pulling

At the

same

time

applied

.5Vis

whichinturn

inputofU950

V

regulatortonear0V

Power

Ifanover-voltage
open,

to

for

the+5V

500

Series

Power

regulator

amplifier

amplifierisconnected

feedback

negative

Darlington

.

0965

cause
+5Vsupply

Zener

resistor

voltageisestablishedbycomparing

inputofU960

input.Any

inputsofU960

transistor

protects

overload

0965

to

off

excessive

an

diode

+11

.5

V

regulator,

the

supply

+11.5Visappliedto0930

totheemitterofcommon

appliesaslightly

for

differences

the

turn

.

VR969

output

This

reduces

.

.

regulatorissupplied

Module

for

condition

amountofvoltage

+11.5V

the

+5Vsupply

U960

and

the

with

causesachangeinthe

0970

supplyinthe eventofa

(increase

on,

which

NOTE

which

V

appliedtoU930

while

the

down

positive

the outputofthe

unregulated

series

for

unity

operational
the

voltage

between
to

in
biases

causes

may

the

correct

current

0970

willbeapplied

damage

reduces

+11.5V

to

base

voltagetothe

pass

gain.R969

amplifier.The

the

referenceatthe

for

through

fuse

the

turns

ground

and

0930,

amplifier

from

supp-

consists

transistor

voltage

negative

conduction

the output

current

R982)

off,

shutting

F970

diode

.

to

.

the

of

is
at

and

3-

MAY

8

1980

Une

Trigger

A

line-frequency

of

TM

500

Series

uatedbyR905,
source

Calibrator

their
wave
the

for

The

Calibrator

associated

output with

power-line

the

signalisobtained

PowerModule

R907,

and

R909toprovide a

time-base

passive

accurate

frequency.This

circuit

.

composed

components

amplitude

from

the

secondary

transformer

of

producesasquare-

andata

outputisavailableatthe

and

line-trigger

0910,0900,

rateoftwice

atten-

and

TheoryofOperation-SC

front

calibrator
peak)

The
receivesapulsatingdovoltage
CR900-CR902

switching

switched
through
sistor

calibrator

jackonthe

square-wave

resistive-capacitive

signal

on

R915

through

or

test

and

for

and

offattwice
alternately

is

signal

voltage

Q910

CR915
.

panel as a0.6V(ground

.

networkatthe

produces

and

Q900.As0910isalternately

the

switched

and

from
a

line

R917,

nearly

baseof0900

full-wave

symmetrical

frequency,

through

producing

502

rectifier

current

the

tran-

the

to

@MAY

1980

3-

9

Section

4-SC

502

CALIBRATION

PERFORMANCE

Introduction

This

procedurechecks
theSC502
section.If

given
procedure

be

usedbyan

acceptability

The

onlyiftheSC502isadjusted

TM

500

module

Function 5Hzto
generator

Time-mark

generator
Calibration

generator 100V;

Leveled
wave

Input
normalizer

Termination

Coaxial
cable inch;connectors,

Dual
cable

Adapter

that

appearinthe

the instrument

in

this

performance

shouldbeperformed.This

incoming

performance

of

electrical

Description

power

sine

generator

input

characteristicsinthis

the

electrical

Specification

failstomeet

inspection

.

an

at

Performance

5

0.2s to 5

Amplitude

accuracy,±0.25%

output,

1
50

47pF

impedance,
within2%;

Impedance,

Bnc

connectors

Bnc-to-pin

squarewave

kHz

.

kHz

to

and

femaleto2

check, the

facility

ambienttemperature

LIST

kHz

.

nsin1, 2,5sequence

calibration,5mV

15

MHz

M11

1

50R;

connectors,

50R;

.

jack

characteristics

portion

requirements

the

adjustment

procedurecan

determine

to

section

.

.

bnc

.

are

OFTEST

Requirements

into1MA

approximately

at

accuracy,

bnc

length,

bnc

42

.

male

of

this

of

also

valid

of

Table

EQUIPMENT

.

to

.

PROCEDURE

CHECK

+20°Cto+300C
of0°Cto+50°C.

Tolerances

procedure
include

Test

Equipment

Belowisa

as

specified.Other

suitable

4-1

REQUIREMENTS

All

steps

Frequency

Sweep

Vertical
accuracy

;

Bandwidth,
sensitivity&range,
&

X-Y

Vertical
input

.

Output
for

signal

Provides

interconnection

X-Y

phasing

Calibrator

that

apply

test

equipment

listofequipment

.

Applications

.

response

rate

accuracy

deflection

.

trigger

phasing

.

amplifier

termination

generator

signal

.

.

and

operatedatan

are

specifiedin

the instrument

to

error

Required

equipment

.

.

.

.

ambient

this

performance

under

test

.

requiredtoverify

may

TEKTRONIX
TM

TEKTRONIX
Function

TEKTRONIX
Time

TEKTRONIX
Calibration

TEKTRONIX

Leveled

Generator'

Tektronix
067-0541-00

Tektronix
011-0049-01

Tektronix
012-0482-00

Tektronix
067-0525-01

Tektronix

013-0084-01

substituted

be

Example

TM

504,TM506

FG

Generator'

TG

Mark

Generator'

PG

Generator'

SG

Sine-Wave

.

partno.

.

partno.

.

partno.

.

partno.

.

partno.

.

temperature

check

anddonot

operation

when

503,

.

503

.

501

.

506

.

503

REV

APR

198

1

41





Calibration
Performance

Procedure-SC

Check

Description

Termination

voltmeter

DC

Plug-in

extension

10X

attenuator

RequiresTM500-series

Preliminary

CH

Control

1

VOLTS/DIV

CAL
DC-GND-AC

CH

2

VOLTS/DIV
CAL

DC-GND-AC
SECONDS/DIV
PULL

X10

HORIZ

CAL

TRIGGERING

AUTO

COUPL

SOURCE

SLOPE

LEVEL

MODE

INTEN
FOCUS

POSITION

CH

CH
POSITION
SINGLE

1.Check
To

+350C)

(vertical)

1

2

(horizontal)

SWP

the

Vertical

DC-GND-AC

VOLTS/DIV

CH

a.Connect

connector

(CH1and

2)

the

calibration

througha50ncoaxial

502

Performance

Impedance,

within2%;

600

n

;

connectors,

0-200V,accuracy,0.1%

50O.

power

module

.

Settings

1
cw

(detent)

GND

1
cw

(detent)
GND
.2

m

MAG-

pushed

in-cw

(detent)

i

n

DC

(all

buttons

CH1

+

-

midrange

CH

1

normal

sharp

Q=

­z

brightness

trace

midrange
midrange
midrange

out

Deflection

Accuracy

DC

20

generatortotheCH1

cable

.

Table

Requirements

accuracy,

bnc

.

.

out)

(+15°C

input

41

(cont)

Low
response

Power
checks

All

steps

Vertical
response

b.Adjust

five

graticule divisions are

c.Check-that

d.Check-readout

listedinTable

When

bient
accuracy

VOLTS/DIV

50
20

10m

Applications

frequency

.

supply
.

.

frequency

.

the

generator

4-2

.

checking

temperature

byan

VERTICAL

Generator

Setting

10

5
2

1
.5
.2

.1 .5

m
m

_

m

5

50

2m
1

m

Tektronix
011-0092-00

TEKTRONIX

Tektronix
067-0645-02

Tektronix
011-0059-02

variable

displayedonthe

the readout

error

for

NO

TE

the

deflection

range

of 0°Cto

additional1.0%

Table

42

DEFLECTION

AND

TOLERANCE

50

V 5

20

V

10V

5V 5
2V

1

V 5

V 5

.2

V 4

.1

V 5

mV
20mV
10

mV

mV

5

Example
partno.

.

partno.

.

partno.

.

control

errorisless

the

following

accuracy

+50°C,derate

.

ACCURACY

Display

4
5

4

5
4

5
5

DM

501A

until
crt

.

than2.0%

atanam-

Tolerance

2

!

2
2

2

-

-

2.0%

I

2
2

2
2

2.0%
5

5

.

exactly

.

settings

the

.0%
.0%

.0%
.0%

.0%
.0%

_

.0%
.0%

_

%

.0%
.0%

_

4-2

REVDAPR

1980









e.Repeat

f.Disconnect

controlstothe

2.Check
DC-GND-AC

VOLTS/DIV

CH
SECONDS/DIV
SOURCE

a.Connecta50

generator output
connector

b.Adjust the

divisionsofdisplay

partsathroughdforCH2

preliminary

the

Vertical

(CH1and

2)

.

all

cables

and

settings

Deflection

DC

lo

1

p

EXT

A

coaxial

connectortothe

generator

.

cable

output

return

.

Variable

m

from

SC

for

.

the

front-panel

the

calibration

502

CH1input

five

Range

graticule

b.Adjust

graticule divisions

c.Set the generator

thefrequency

4.2major

d.Check-that

generatorisequal

e.Change

f.Connect

input
50

kHz

g.Repeat

h

.Leave

the

variable

divisionsinamplitude

the

the

connector

and

set

the

partscanddto

all

controls

generator

.

frequency

until

the

to or

greater

MODE

sine-wave

and

return

amplitude

and

Calibration

foracrt

thedisplayed

frequency

switchtoCH2.

the

check

connections

Procedure-SC

Performance

displayofexactly

to 15

.

readout from the

than15MHz

generator output

generator

for six

graticule

theCH2

MHz

signal

frequency

for

the

Check

adjust

and

is at

least

.

CH

to

divisions

bandwidth

next step

502

six

2

to

.

.

.

c.Rotate

displayed

d

clockwise

e.Check-that

divisions

f.Connect

connector

g.Disconnect

controlstothe

3.Check
20

signal

Turn

CH

the

position

in

amplitude

and

the

2)

.

V/div)

VOLTS/DIV

DC-GND-AC

SECONDS/DIV

the

CH1POSITION

on the screen

1

CH

.

the

the50A
repeat

parts

all

preliminary

Vertical

(CH1and

.

CAL

controltothe

displayisless

.

coaxial

cables

Bandwidth

cable to

througheof

b

and

settings

5
DC

1

controlstocenter

fully

than

two

graticule

the

CH

this

procedure

return

the

front-panel

.

(5

mV/div

m

m

the

counter-

2

input

to

4.Check
VOLTS/DIV

CH

a.Return

leveled
graticule divisions

.

the
4

generatorisequaltoor

nector
set

sine-wave

b.Set the

frequency

.2

divisions

c.Check-that

d.Change

Connect

e

.

and

the

amplitude

the

2)

return

Vertical
(CH1and

the

generator

generator

.

generator

variable

in

the

until

amplitude

the

MODE

the

generator

the

generator

for six divisions

Bandwidth

to 50

foracrt

frequencyto10

the displayed

.

frequency

greater

switchtoCH1.

outputtoCH1input

(2

2

m

kHz and

displayofexactly

readout

than 10

frequencyto50

.

mV/div)

adjust

MHz

and

signalisat

from

MHz

.

adjust

kHz

the

six

least

the

con-

and

a.Connect

connector
coaxial

theSC502

REVGAPR

cable,

of

198

CH

a

the

X10

0

50

leveled

1

input

kHz

sine-wave

sine-wave

attenuator,

connector

signal

from

generator

and

a 500termination

.

the output

through

to

b

f.Repeat

a

g

.Leave

parts

all

andcto

controls

and

connections

check

theCH2

for

bandwidth

the

next

step

4-3

.

.

















Calibration
Performance

Check

5

.

VOLTS/DIV

a.Return

leveled
divisions

b.Set
frequency
major

c

.

generatorisequal to or

d.Change

e.Connect

tor

and

the

amplitude

Procedure-SC

Check

the

Vertical
(CH1and

CH

2)

generatorto50

the

sine-wave

.

the

variable

divisionsinamplitude

Check-that

return

generator

generator

until

the

the

MODE

the

generator

the generator

for six

502

Bandwidth

foracrt

frequency

the

displayed

.

frequency

greater

switch to

output
frequency

divisions

1

m

to5

than5.0

to

.

(1

mV/div)

kHz and

display

MHzandadjustthe

signal

readout

CH

CH2input

MHz

2

.

to 50

adjust

of

exactly

is at

from

.

kHz

the

six

least4.2

the

connec-

and

set

e.Check-that

4.2divisions

f.Set

generatortotheCH2

throughe.

g

.

controls

7.Check
VOLTS/DIV

MODE
DC-GND-AC
SOURCE

SECONDS/DIV

a.Connecta0

calibration

the
theCH2

.

the

Disconnect

the

to

theDisplayed

2)

CH

input

MODE

all

preliminary

(CH1and

.2

generator

connector

thedisplayed

switch

input

connector

cables

mV

and

settings

Noise

standard

through

.

amplitudeisgreater

2,

to

CH

return

1

m
CH
DC

EXT
5

.0

/is

amplitude

a 50

reconnect

and

repeat

front-panel

the

.

2

signal

0

coaxial

than

the

parts

from

cableto

b

f.Repeat

Disconnect

g

.

trolstothe

6.Check
MODE

VOLTS/DIV

CH

2)

DC-GN
SECONDS/DIV

a.Adjust

defined

generator

termination,

six

pl

Connect

b

.

Adjust the

c

.
graticule

ayed)

Set the

d

.

lineonthe

.

partsband

preliminary

the

AC

(CH1and

D-AC

the

INTEN

a 10Hzsine-wave

through

to

the

function

divisionsofdisplay

DC-GND-AC

c

all

cables

settings

Response

LF

and

crt

display

a 50

CH1input

to

check

return

and

.

CH

.5
DC

AMPL

FOCUS

.

signal

O

coaxial

connector

generator

switch

theCH2

front

1

controls

from

the

cable,

witha500

.

amplitude

output

vertical line dis-

(one

toAC.

bandwidth

panel con-

forawell-

function

for

.

b.Adjust

defined display

c.Check-to

on

the

d.Change

generatortothe

the
partsathroughc.

e.Disconnect

controls

8.Check
SECONDS/DIV

VOLTS/DIV

DC-G

a.Connect

the

calibration

the

CH1input

b.Rotate the
clockwise
the

peaks

CH

crt

to

N

display

the

the

2)
D-AC

and
of

.

DISPLAY

CH1input

all

cables

1

and

V

.12

vertical

and

Range

standard

througha500coaxial

the

INTEN

.

distinguish

the

preliminary

Position

(CH

a0

generator

connector

counterclockwise

the displayed

FOCUS

spacebetween

switchtoCH

connector

and

return

settings

.

waveform

.

m

.5

lo

m

AC

amplitude

POSITION

and

controls

the

1andreconnect

the

control

note the

.

well-

for

a

lines

two

and

repeat

front-panel

signal

from

cable

to

fully

position

of

4-4

REV

APR

D

1980

















c.Check-that

waveform

d.Rotate the

e.Set

CH2.

Reconnect

tor

and

f.Disconnect
the

preliminary

to

9.Check
SECONDS/DIV

a.Adjust the

trace

.

b.Check-for

controls

the

canbepositioned

vertical

the

MODE

the generatortotheCH2

repeat

partsbthroughd.

cable

settings

CH1and

TRIGGERING

one

.

positive

switchtoCH2and

and

to

POSITION

return

and

the

the

negative

center

graticule

control

the

front-panel

.

CH2Operation

1

m

LEVEL

control

trace

affectedbyCH1front-panel

peaksofthe

midrange

to

source

input

connec-

controls

foravisible

line

11.Check

.

.

simultaneously

to

through.5.

settings

12.Check

that
the trace

SECONDS/DIV
MODE

a.Check-that

b.Return

.

DISPLAY

Check-that

a

.

theCH1

b.Return the

settings

.

Calibration

Chopped

for

the

1-2

and

Operation

two

traces

SECONDS/DIV

each

front-panel

Operation

one

traceisvisibleonthe screen

CH2vertical

equallyinopposite

front-panel

Procedure-SC

Performance

5

m

CHOP

move

across the screen

setting

controlstothe

1-2

POSITION

directions

controls

.

controlstothe

502

Check

from5m

preliminary

and

move

preliminary

c.Set the

d.Check-for

controls

.

e.Return

settings

.

10.Check
SECONDS/DIV

MODE

Check-for

a

.

b.Adjust

for

approximately

traces

.

c.Check-that

and

CH2traces

through.5.

MODE

one

front-panel

the

Alternate

two

CH1and

one

the

for

each

switchtoCH2.

trace

affectedbyCH2front-panel

controls

to

the

Operation

5

m

ALT

tracesonthe

CH2vertical

major

division

sweep

SECONDS/DIV

screen

POSITION
separation

alternates

setting

preliminary

.

controls

between

between

from5m

CH

13.Check
+35°

VOLTS/DIV

DC-GND-AC
SECONDS/DIV

a.Connect
generator
termination,tothe

b.Rotate the

display.Vertically
crt

viewing

c.Check-thatone

is

displayed

in

Table

d.Disconnect

1

C)

CH

the

2)

through

area

on the

4-3

.

Calibrated

(CH1and

.1mtime

a 50

CH

TRIGGERING

position

.

crt

within

all

cables

1

input

time

NOTE

Sweep

.5
DC

.1

marks

A

coaxial

connector

LEVEL

the

displaytothe

marker

the

.

Range

m

from

cable,

control

per

accuracy

(+15°C

the

time-mark

with

.

forastable

center

graticule

tolerance

to

a 50

0

the

of

division

listed

d.Return the

settings

REVFAPR

.

1980

front-panel

controlstothe

preliminary

When

checking
temperature
accuracy

range

byan

sweep

of

0°C

accuracyatan

to

the

additional1%.

+50°C,

ambient

derate the

4-

5







Calibration
Performance

Procedure-SC

Check

HORIZONTAL

SECOND

0.5s/div

50

ms/divto1

ps/divto0.2ps/div

0

.5

14.Check

S/DIV

to0.1

the

SECONDS/DIV

Connect5ms

a

.

generator

termination,

through

to the

b.Rotate the
display.Vertically
crt

viewing

area

Table

DEFLECTION

s/div

ps/div

Sweep

time

a 50

1

CH

TRIGGERING

position

.

502

43

UnmagnIfied

Variable

0

marks

coaxial

A

input

connector

LEVEL

the

display

t3%
t2%

f3%

.5

ACCURACY

Range

m

from

cable,

control

to the

Magnified

t4%
t3%

t2%

the

time-mark

witha50

.

forastable

centerofthe

a.Connect

input

connector

output

amplitude

b.Adjust

four

graticule divisions

c.Check-that

d.Disconnect

Check

17

.

0

a.Connect

sine-wave
50ntermination,tothe

b.Adjust

graticule

the

through

the

the

External

a 50

generator

the

generator

divisions

calibration

a 50 n

for0.2V.

generator

are

the

readout

all

cables

kHz

sine-wave

thorugh

EXT

.

generatortothe

coaxial

variable

cable

control

displayedonthe

errorisless

.

Horizontal

a

TRIG

foracrt

Bandwidth

signal

from

50 n

coaxial

input

.

displayofexactly

EXT

and

set

until

exactly

crt

.

than5%.

the

leveled

cable, to

TRIG

its

a

five

c.Turn

the

counterclockwise

Check-that

d

.

ninth

graticule

e.Disconnect

15.Check
PULL

X10

the

HORIZ

a.Horizontally

sweep)

on

the

b.Depress

c.Check-that

divisionofthe

d.Return

settings

16.Check

the

.

the

Factor

SECONDS/DIV

SECONDS/DIV

position

the

third

line

.

the cable

Mag

Register

MAG

position

graticule

the

PULL

the

beginningofthetrace

graticule

front-panel

External

.

markeristo

.

out

the

center

line

X10

HORIZ

center

line

controlstothe

Horizontal

AMP

CAL

sweep

.

.

control

the

start

MAG

switch

Deflection

the

fully

to

leftofthe

(left

end

.

within0.5

is

preliminary

of

the generator

c.Set

d.Check-that

measured

e.Disconnect

18.Check
VOLTS/DIV

CH

horizontally

2)

the

XY

(CH1and

the

the

DC-GND-AC

SECONDS/DIV

a.Connecta5O

sine-wave

generator

kHz

500termination,tothe

TRIG

input

1

CH

the

controls

connectors

generator

DC-GND-AC

display

.

EXT

b.Adjust the

eight

graticule divisions

Set

c

.

d.Center

POSITION

frequencyto2

display

is

MHz

greater

.

cable

.

Phasing

50

m

GND

AMP

sine-wave

througha50

dual

input

signal
f2

coaxial

cable, to

.

forahorizontal deflection

on the

crt

display

toDC.

the

on

crt

.

than 3.5divisions

the

cable, to

the

CH1and

leveled

the

from

of

.

screen

with

the

4-

6

REVEAPR

1980













e.Check-that

center,isless

f.Disconnect

controlstothe

19.Check
SECONDS/DIV

VOLTS/DIV

CH

2)

DC-GND-AC

a.Connect

generator
tion,tothe

through

CH

b.Adjust the

graticule

divisiononthe

than0.4

all

preliminary

the

Trigger

(CH1and

a 5

MHz

a50f2coaxial

1

input

generator'

the

graticule

cables

signal

connector

horizontal

division

and

settings

Sensitivity

.5

Fu

.5
DC

from

cable,

.

output

crt

screen

opening,

.

return

the

.

(below5MHz)

the

leveled
toa50

amplitude

.

at

screen

front-panel

sine-wave

f1termina-

for0.4

m.Connecta5

generator

through

tion,tothe

n.Set the

CH2input

MHz

a 50

front-panel

MODE
SOURCE

SLOPE

o.Repeat

check

20.Trigger
a.Change

adjust

b.Adjust the

partsbthroughIof

trigger

the

Sensitivity(5MHz

the output

sensitivity

the generator

frequency

generator amplitude

divisionofdisplayonthe

Calibration

Procedure-SC

Performance

signal

from

the

1)

coaxial

connector

cable,

.

controlsasfollows

CH

2

CH

2

+

the

above

forCH2

.

to15MHz)

frequency

for15MHz

crt

screen

.

leveled

to a

500termi

procedure

to15MHz

.

for

one

502

Check

sine-wave

na-

:

to

and

graticule

c.Check-thatatriggered

be obtainedatsome

control

.

d.Set

the

SLOPE

settingofthe

switchto-

e.Check-thatatriggered

be obtainedatsome

control

.

f.Release

Check-repeat

g

.

the

h.Depress

i .

Check-repeat

j.Release

pressinthe

COUPL

setting

AUTO

partscthroughe.

the

COUPL

partscthroughe.

the acLFREJ

AC

positive-going

negative-going

the

of

button

(Normal

acLFREJ

switch

pushbutton

TRIGGERING

position

TRIGGERING

Mode)

switch

(out

position)

.

.

display

display

.

.

can

LEVEL

can

LEVEL

and

c.Set the

SLOPE

switch

d.Check-thatatriggered

obtainedatsome

be
control

.

e.Reset

f.Check-that

be

obtainedatsome

control

.

g.Release

h.Check-repeat

i .

Press the LF

j.Check-repeat

the

settingofthe

SLOPE

triggered

a

settingofthe

the

AUTO

partscthroughf.

REJ

partscthroughf.

to+position

positive-going

switchto-

negative-going

button

button

.

TRIGGERING

position

TRIGGERING

(Normal

.

.

Mode)

display

LEVEL

display

LEVEL

.

can

can

k.Check-repeat

I .

Release

button

.

REVEAPR

1980

the

parts

AC

pushbutton

through

c

and

e

.

press

the

AUTO

k.Release

position

and

I.Check-repeat

theACandLFREJ

press

the

COUPL

partscthroughf.

pushbuttonstothe

AC

switch

.

out

4-7



















Calibration
Performance

m.Release

.

button

n.Reconnect

tor

.

o.Set
MODE

SOURCE

SLOPE

p.Repeats

check

the

q.Disconnect

controls

21

to

Check

.

SECONDS/DIV

1

DC-GND-AC

CH
CH1VOLTS/DIV

Procedure-SC

Check

the

the

the

front-panel

parts

trigger

the

preliminary

Auto,

sensitivity

the

502

AC

pushbutton

generatortotheCH1input

controlsasfollows

throughIinthe

b

cable

settings

Normal,

CH
CH1

+

forCH1

and

return

and

Single

0.5m
DC

1

and

1

.

press

above

.

the

Sweep

AUTO

the

connec-

:

procedure

front-panel

Modes

to

j.Set

the

k.Press

I.Press

m

SINGLE

n.Disconnect

controlstothe

22.Check
CH1VOLTS/DIV

CH
SECONDS/DIV

a.Connect

input

b

.

within

the

and

Check-that

.

SWP

1

DC-GND-AC

connector

Check-that

.06

divisions

SOURCE

SINGLE

RESET

preliminary

the

the outputofthe

switchtoCH1.

release

the

the

trace

button

the

cable

Calibrator

using the

the

display

.

SWP

buttonin.

SWP

SGL

appears

is

and

settings

.1

pin-jack-to-bnc

button

once

pressed

return

.

DC
1

m

calibrator to

amplitude

and

.

each

released

front-panel

the

adapter

six

is

time

the
.

the

CH

.

divisions

1

Connect

a

.

connector
termination

b.Set

the

amplitude

TRIGGERING

c.Set the

d.Check-that

e.Set

f.Release

g.Check-for

h.Press

the

function

througha50
.

the generator

foradisplayofsix

the

LEVEL

SOURCE

SOURCE

the

the

the

AUTO

a

visible

SOURCE

control

generator

A

coaxial

fora1

switchtoEXT

sweep

switch to

forastable

free

button

trace

EXT

kHz

(Normal

.

button

the

to

CH

cable

and

sine

wave

divisions.Adjust

display

.

runs

.

CH1.

Mode)

.

and

.

1

input

a 50

adjust

.

the

II

c.Disconnect

controls

23.Check
SECONDS/DIV

AUTO
SOURCE
COUPL

a.Connect

A

coaxial

50

b.Press

the

following

c.Set the

adjust

the

six

divisions

d.Set the

to the

the

cable

and

steps

generator

sine-wave

.

TRIGGERING

the cable

preliminary

External

the

leveled
anda50Atermination

the

hold

.

generator

and

settings

TriggerLevel

10 us
OUT
EXT
AC

sine-wave

TRIG

VIEW

frequency

amplitude

LEVEL

return

the

.

generator

pushbutton

rangeto50

for

control

front-panel

Range

through

EXT

to

display

a

midrange

to

TRIG

during

kHzand

a

.

of

.

4-8

Check-that

i

.

the

trace

disappears

.

e.Check-that

the

READY

TRIG'D

lightison

REVEAPR

.

1980

f.Adjust

clockwise

Calibration

the

TRIGGERING

.

LEVEL

control

fully

b.Setthe generator

amplitude

foradisplayofeight

frequncy

Procedure-SC

Performance

50

kHz

to

divisions

502

Check

and

adjust

the

.

Check-that

g

.

trace

stops

running

h

.

the

Set

terclockwise

i .

Check-that

trace

stops

running

j.Release

k.Disconnect

controlstothe

Check

24

.

SECONDS/DIV

1

DC-GND-AC

CH
AUTO

CH1VOLTS/DIV
COUPL

the

TRIGGERING

.

the

the

TRIGVIEW

the

preliminary

the

Internal

.

.

READY

READY

cable

TRIG'D

LEVEL

TRIG'D

pushbutton

and

settings

Trigger

10
DC
OUT
.2
AC

control

lightisoff

return

.

Level

/is

lightisoff

fully

.

the

front-panel

Range

and

coun-

and

the

the

c.Adjust the

midrange

clockwise

sweep

clockwise

the

c

throughi.

.

d.Check-that

e.Set the

f .

Set

.

g.Check-that

stops

h.Set the

.

i.Check-that

sweep

j.Change

TRIGGERING

the

CH1VOLTS/DIV

the

TRIGGERING

the

.

TIRGGERING

the

stops

.

TRIGGERING

READY

READY

READY

TRIG'D

TRIG'D

LEVEL

TRIG'D

SLOPE

to0.1

LEVEL

control

to-and

LEVEL

lightison

.

control

lightisoff

light

control

fully

turns

repeat

to

.

fully

and

the

counter-

off

and

parts

a.Connect

through

1

input

CH

a50

connector

the

n

coaxial

leveled

cable

.

sine-wave

anda50IIterminationtothe

generator output

k.Disconnect
controlstothe
Performance

all

preliminary

Check

Procedure

cables

and

return

settings

.

.

This

the

front-panel

completes

the

REVDAPR

1980

4-

9



































Calibration
Adjustment

Adjustment
made,orafter
components

To
every

infrequently

Before

inspect

the

Power

contains

also
instrument,

nent

Tektronix,
and
the

Tektronix

information

Dangerous
throughtout
operated
exposed

power

Series
or

OFF
oscilloscope

Preliminary

The
at
Make

f5°C.

Procedure-SC

ensure
2000

hours

.

complete

this

instrument as
Module

identification

calibration

Factory

by

Power

replacing

position

performanceofthis

any

temperature

any

502

Procedure

ADJUSTMENT

generally required

is

long time

may

instrument accuracy,

information

including

Inc.provides

Field

.

potentials

this

with

connectionsorcomponents

removing

Module

parts.The

.

Procedure

adjustmentata

intervals

affect

instrument

operation,orevery

of

calibration,

outlinedinthe

manual.The

for

preventive

and

replacement, etc

NOTE

complete

local Field

at

Service

does

Center

Officeorrepresentative

WARNING

instrument

the

covers

the

before

SC

not

remove

NO

instrument

within the0°Cto+50°

in

thoroughly
Power

general

maintenance,

Service

.

Contact

exist

.

When

removed,

502

SC

cleaning

502

TE

temperature

afterarepair

which

accuracy

check

instrument

at

from

MODE

all

has

been

normal

six

service

Module

maintenanceofthis

.

Centers

several

the

do

theinstrument

power

can

aging

.

the

calibration

monthsifused

clean

section

manual

compo-

repair

and

at

your

local

for

further

points

instrument

not

.

Disconnect

theTM500-

switch

be

of

touch

PWR

from

checked

range

C

+25°

is

the

C,

of

and

of

.

PROCEDURE

the

input

includes

Power

a

source

3.Remove
covers
using

the

a

FOCUS
INTENSITY

TRIGGER

MODE
POSITION

CH

CH

CH

VOLTS/DIV
AC-GND-DC

CH

VOLTS/DIV
AC-GND-DC

POSITION
SECONDS/DIV

CAL/SWP

Trigger

SINGLE

AUTO

COUPLING

AC
LF

SOURCE

CH
CH

EXT

SLOPE

LEVEL

Module

Connect

.
.

connectthe

and

plug-in

Set the

.

1

2

1

2

REJ

1
2

(Triggering)

line

Manual

Power

the

extension

following

VIEW

(Vertical)

(Horizontal)Midrange

MAG

Mode

SWP

(Triggering)

voltage

.

502

SC

oscilloscopetothe

See

.

Module

Oscilloscope

.

controls

As

Fully
As
PWR

midrange
midrange

0

.1

AC

.02
GND

0

.5

Fully
pushed

Out
Pushed

Pushed
Out

Pushed
Out
Out

+
As

Installation

to

:

is

counterclockwise

is

OFF

ms

clockwise

position

position

position

position

is

the

in

in

in

in

Section

line

side

Power

of

voltage

and top
Module,

and

Check

1

.
500

TM

2.Connect
Moduletothe

Power
220Vac)

4-10

Series

Also

.

that

the

Power

the

check

powerisOFF

that

.

line

line

the

Module

nominal

correct

both theSC502

in

selector

selector

regulating

blockofthe

pins

(120Vac

range

and

or

selected

4.Turn

switch

power

out

.

a.Turn

.

the

Power

theSC502

Module

MODE

by

pulling

on

switchtoCH

REVD

Power

the

1toapply

APR

1980

any

If
power

power
the

before the
supply

work

supplies,

supplies

correct

adjustments

voltage

warm-up

5.Allow15minutes

stabilize

.

been

then the

performed

+20V,-20Vand

has

mustbecheckedtobe

immediately

period.See

.

for

theSC502

on

the

within

after

turn-on

step1for

warm-up

to

SC

+5

0.2V
power

502

and

of

V

and

3.Adjust

To

not allow a
extended

Connect

beam

and

Beam

possible

avoid

bright

period of time

the

current

test

the voltmeter

Current

damage
spottoremain

positive

point

negative

the voltmetertomeasure

Calibration

R873

Adjustment

(F&I

to

the

Procedure-SC

Procedure

Circuit

crt

phosphor,

stationary

within

the viewing area

leadofthedovoltmeter

main

full

circuit

scale

ground.Set

.

(located

on

leadtoa chassis

about2V

Board)

do

for

an

.

to the

board)

502

Adjustment

Procedure

NO

The
Locations"
tionofeach

1.Adjust
and

R947

tabbed

foldout

contains

adjustmentinthis

V

and

Circuit

+20
(Trigger

page

illustrations

-20

NOTE

Adjusting the

+20Vand

-20Vpower
the0.1%dovoltmeterisadequate
operation;however,ifthe

way

the

voltage
or

less

the

+20Vand

adjusted

accuracy

Connect

and

the

voltmeter

output

cannotbeguaranteedtobe

calibrator

withado
.

the do

ground

readingof+20V±0

CAL

output

-20Vpower
voltmeter

voltmeter

test

point.Adjust

peak-to-peak

amplitudeisrequired,

between

TE

labeled

showing

procedure

V

Power

Supplies

Board)

supplies

for

oscilloscope

supplies

areadjusted

square-wave

within1%.Ifa

supplies

havingatleasta0

the

+20Vtest

+20

.06V.

"Adjustment

the

loca-

.

R925

with

this

1

then

must

be

.01

V,

R925

for

poi

nt

a

Set

the

horizontal

crt
clockwise

Adjust

±0

.01V.

SITY

4.Adjust

POSITION

viewing

.

Beam,

Disconnect

controltoits

Astigmatism

Connectatest

Trigger

the
(Astigmatism)
focused

5.Adjust

waveform.Remove

Trace

Set

theSC502

theSC502

Adjust

Trace,

center

horizontal

6.Adjust
(Below

Geometry

SN

502

area,

SECONDS/DIV

and

SC

R873

the

midrange

lead

oscilloscope

and

the

Rotation
SECONDS/DIV

to

the

trace

R895

graticule

B039280)

switchtoAMP,

controltoposition

INTENSITY

the

foravoltmeter

voltmeter

R899

from

CH1to the

and

INTENSITY

the

R895

position

(F&I

adjust

test

(F&I

and

.

Circuit

FOCUS

control

lead

switchto.5

horizontal

center

until

the

crt

traceisparallel

line

.

R897,

F&ICircuit

the spot

control

reading

turn

the

CAL

connector

control

foraclearly

.

Circuit

m

graticule

Board

off

fully

.40

of

0

INTEN-

Board)

R899

Board)

.

Position

line

to the

the
the

V

.

.

Disconnect

connect

test

it

point.Adjust

-20V±0.1V

Disconnect

2

Check

Connect

the

and
+5

REV

ground

.07V±0

MAY

1982

the

voltmeter

between

the

-20Vtest

-20V,R947

.

the

voltmeter

V

Power

+5

the do voltmeter

test

point.Check

.08V.

from

foravoltmeter

.

Supply

between

foravoltmeter

the

+20

point

the+5V

V

and

test

the

pointand

ground

reading

test

point

reading

of

of

Geometry
sweep

adjustment

timing

.

Connect0.5mstime-markers

minated
Triggerthe

vertical
reference.The
compromise
division or

time

Adjust

Geom

lines,

Disconnect

mark

display

using the

adjustment

to

less

tolerance

the

generatortothe

and

adjustCH1

for

R897

bring

all

time-mark

NOTE

will

cause

minimum

vertical

of

points

.

generator

some

form

CH1input

POSITION

graticule

R897

within

change

the

properly

connector

bow

or

lines

may

havetobe

the 0.1major

.

in

ter-

fully

ccw

tiltofthe

as the

4-

.

.

a

1 1

Calibration

Adjustment

7.Adjust
Balance

Set the

VOLTS/DIV
center

POSITION

Rotatethe

Step
back

CH1VOLTS/DIV
the center

position

is

removed

Change

the

above

8.Adjust

Procedure-SC

Procedure

Channel

R135

CH1AC-GND-DC

switchto0.2.

horizontal

control

Bal

R135

to the

center

horizontal

control,

.

theSC502

step

Channel

502

1&2

Preamplifier

and

R235

(Main

Circuit

switchtoGND

graticule

Position

line

the

using the

.

CH1VOLTS/DIVswitchto1m.

(CH2Step

switchto0.2and

then

for

channel2.

Bal

horizontal

graticule

repeat

MODE

1&2

Preamplifier

R235)tobring

graticule

return

line

using

this

step

until

switchtoCH2and

CapacitanceC105,C115,C119,C205,
C219

(Main

Set theCH2

DIV

switchto10mand
Connect
connector.Connectaproperly

signal

from

to the

malizer.Adjust the
an output

5

div)

.

display

Adjust

attenautor
to.5and
generatortoobtain

C215

(C115)

front

corner having2%peakor3%

aberrations
to

balance

Change

the

applicableCH1

for

Channel1.

47pFnormalizer

9.Adjust
R280

(Main

Set theCH1

triggering
dardized

Circuit

Board)

AC-GND-DC

triggering

the

a 47

pF

input

normalizertothe

the pulse

CH2input

generator

connector

pulse

generator

amplitudeofapproximately

Adjust

the

triggering

.

C205

(C105)

from

the

increase

foraflat

cable.Change

the output

againa5major

for

a

flat

top

and

on

the displayed

waveform.(C333

Channel1aberrations

theSC502

MODE

controls,

Disconnect

the

.

Channel1&2Preamplifier

Circuit

LEVEL

amplitude

Board)

VOLTS/DIV

fully

signal

switchto10mand

clockwise.Connecta50

from

switchtoDC,

SOURCE

terminated high

througha10X

via

the

fora1msperiod

LEVEL

control

top.Remove

the

VOLTS/DIV

amplitudeofthe pulse

division

C219,

(C119)

peak-to-peakorless
with

switchtoCH1,along

and

repeat

pulse

generator

the pulse

Attenuator

Board)

and

crt

tracetothe

CH1vertical

AdjustCH1
the

crt

line.Return

the

crt

trace

the

all

interaction

Input

C215

the

VOLTS/

toCH2

CH2input

amplitude

attenautor

47 pF

input

50

mV

(10

forastable

the

signal.Adjust

forasquare

is

selected

Channel2.)

the

above

and

Gain

R180

rotate

mV

generator

the

trace

the

to

vertical

repeat

and

nor-

and

mV

X

10X

switch

of

with
step

the

and

the

stan-

to the

1

input

CH
control

to center

Adjust

waveform

Check

that
the

within

VOLTS/DIV

Setting

1

mV

2

mV
m

V

5

10

mV

20

mV

50mV

.1

V

.2V

.

.5V

1

V
2V
5

V

10V

20

V

Change

the

applicableCH2

for

channel2.

.

Adjust

10
Centering

Set the

switch

to 10mand
Connect
generatortotheCH2
ing

LEVEL

vertical
check

POSITION

that
positioned
positioning

positioned
positioning
line

.

Adjust

and

bottomofthe
equal distanceofthe
extremesofthe

.

display

Gain

Adjust

.

R180

CH

(CH2Gain

connector

1

CH

amplitudeofexactly5major

the

remaining

tolerance

VOLTS/DIV

Standardized

Amplitude
Applied

10
20

50

VOLTS/DIV

listedinTable44.

44

Table

ATTENUATOR

Display

Amplitude

to

In

Input

5

mV

Divisions

mV
m

V

mV

.1

mV

V

.2
.5

V

1V

I

2V

5V

10V

20

V

50

V

100

V 5

theSC502

Disconnect

MODE

controls,

switchtoCH2,along
and

the pulse generator

Channel1&2Preamplifier

R335

and

R394

(F&I

CH2AC-GND-DC

a200

mV

pulsewith a1ms

control

forastable

the

input

to

triggering

connector.Adjust

display.Rotate

controltoeach

the

at

upward),
at

downward)

Vert

Pos

bottom

least

least

CH2R394

pulse

one

and
one

the pulse

of

major

that

thetopofthe

major

the

graticule

(CH1R335)sothat

waveform

graticule

vertical

POSITION

1

(CH2)POSITION

grati

culedivisions

switch

CHECK

Major

5
5

4
5
5

'
I

4
5
5

j

4
5

I

5

4

I

5

repeat

the

Circuit

the

AC,

SOURCE

period

from

its

extremes

of

display

division

division

above

below,

horizontal

are

brought

center

lineatthe

control

.

R280)

for

positions

Tolerance

5%
5%
2%

Adjusted

2%
2%

2%
2%
2%

2%
2%
2%
2%
2%

above

.

Position

Board)

VOLTS/DIV

to

CH2.

the pulse

thetrigger-

theCH2

can

(when

pulse

can

(when

center

thetop

within

a

.

are

with
step

and

be
be

an

two

412

REV

D

APR

198

0



Change
the applicableCH1
for

channel2.

11.Adjust
C473,

Set
triggering

terminated,60mV

pulse

tor.Adjust

display

Adjust

crt

the

Set

pulse generator

Adjust
alignment
offorovershoot

Change
the applicableCH2
above

theSC502

Disconnect

Vertical

and

C474(F&I

theSC502

SOURCE

from

the

pulse

the

.

R465

for

displayed

theSC502

R473,

tool)

for

theSC502

adjustments

MODE

controls,

Output

switchtoCH1,along

and

the

pulse generator

Amplifier

Circuit

SECONDS/DIV

switchtoCH

positive-going,

generatortotheCH1

triggering

flat

waveform

top

LEVEL

without

.

SECONDS/DIV

fora1

C473

the

pulse

/is

and

C474

squarest

.

MODE

controls,

using

switchtoCH

and

Channel2.

repeat the

Board)

switchto2 p

1 .

Connectaproperly

fast-rise,10ps

control

roll-offorovershoot

switch

period

.

(usingalow-capacitance
front

corner

check

the

Adjust
matchofaberrationstoCH1.Ifnecessary,
above

adjustmentsothat the

both

vertical

channels.Disconnect

amplifier

the

response
pulse generator

with

above

.

R465, R473,

and

period

input

connec-

forastable

p

and

to

.2

without

along

2,

results

of

for

C387

compromise

equal

is

.

step

the

on

the

roll-

with

the

best

the

for

13.Adjust
SettheSC

Sweep

Offset

502

SECONDS/DIVswitch
SOURCE
positive lead to
venient
scale

Adjust

Disconnect

14.Adjust

(Hor

Connect

withajumper

the

to
jumper

15.Adjust

switchtoCH1.

ground.Set

.

Offset

thedovoltmeter

Horizontal

Dell

Circuit

TP745

Adjust

.

vertical

graticule

.

Sweep

TP677

the voltmetertoread

R681

Board)

(TP

Center

Gain

Board)

Set the
SECONDS/DIV
fromaproperly
CH1input
a

stable

center

Adjust
time

marker
second and
their

respective

connector

display

the

of

Sweep

CH

1VOLTS/DIV

to.2m.Connect0.2

terminated time

.

Vertically

.

viewing

areaofthe

Gain

per

major

tenth

time

graticule

Calibration

Procedure-SC

Adjustment

R681

(Main

Circuit

MODEswitchtoCH

to.2

and

mand

Connect

the

negative

the

the

do

lead

about2V

for a

voltmeter

readingof0 V

.

Amplifier

test

point)

Centering

temporarily

R760toposition

center

line.Remove

R770

(Hor

Defl

switch

time-markers

ms

generatortothe

mark

Rotatethe

R770
graticule

markers

lines

LEVEL

controltoobtain

position

untilanSC

crt

the

displaytothe

.

502

divisionisobtained

must

lineupexactly

.

Procedure

Board)

1,the

triggering

voltmeter

a

to

R760

ground

to

the

crt

the

shorting

Circuit

to

.5,

display

502

con-

full

spot

set

of 1-

.

The

with

.

12.Check
Set

DIV

switch
the

and

properly

a

2 input

CH
sine-wave

Vertical

theSC502

MODE

to 5m,thetriggering

triggering

LEVEL

terminated

connector.Set the

generator

amplitudetoobtain
display

.

Without

sine-wave

15

MHz.Check

major

Change

disturbing

generator,

that

divisions;if itisnot,

theSC502

the applicableCH1

channel1.

REV

MAY

Disconnect

198

2

Bandwidth

switchtoCH2,the

SOURCE

control

leveled

sine-wave

output

to 50

kHz and

major

6

the

increase

display

the

divisions of

output

the

repeat

MODE

controls

the

switch

and

sine-wave

SECONDS/

switchtoCH2,

fully

clockwise.Connect

generator

frequency

adjust

its

SC

amplitude

generator

amplitudeisat

control

frequency

least4.2

step11adjustments

1

CH

the

bandwidth

along

.

to

check

generator

to

of

output

502

on

with

the
the

crt

the

to
.

of

16.Adjust
Board)

Change

supply 20

/is

SECONDS/DIV

Adjust

Mag

per

major

graticule

tenth

time

respective

17.Adjust

Set theSC502

the

CAL/SWP

generator
CH1input

X10

Magnifier

the

time

mark

markers

CAL/SWP

Gain

R708

divisionisobtained.The

markers

graticule

Fast

lines

Timing

SECONDS/DIV

MAG

outputsoit

connector

Gain

R708

generator

totheCH1

MAG

output soitwill

input

connector.Pull

control

untiladisplayof1-time

must

lineupexactly

.

C1005

(Main

switchto1uand push

controlin.

will

now

Change

supply

1usmarkerstothe

.

(Main

out

.

second

with

Circuit

the

time-mark

Circuit

now

the

marker

and

their

Board)

4-13

Calibration
Adjustment

Adjust

per

major
tenth
graticule

Change
outputofthe
SC

502

division
Check

Time

graticule

markers

lines

display

(within

all

sweep

Procedure-SC

Procedure

C1005

divisionisobtained.The

must

line

.

the

SECONDS/DIV

time-mark

for

one-time

3%)inthe

rates
appropriatetimemarkers,
marker
and0.2Nsand

compromise
graticule

tolerance.Disconnect

18.Adjust

The

per

major

within2%from1,usto5

final

adjustment
so

divisions for

External

graticule

that

the

the

the time

Board)

502

untiladisplayofone-time

second

exactly

up

generatorto0.2ps

switch

marker

with

per

their

and

major

respective

the

.

Check

center8graticule divisions

between0.2psand

and

check

display

division

of

time

above

Balance

(within3%for

C1005

may

markersinthe
sweep

mark

generator

R535

again

ps)

.

need

rates

are

(Trigger

51rs,

marker

and

marker

the

graticule

using

for

one

0.5,us

to

be

center

all

within

.

Circuit

.

a
8

Release

SECONDS/DIV
SOURCE

generator
connecta0

generatortothe

pulse

Adjust

screen

.

Adjust Ext
divisions
generator

between

.

20.Adjust
Circuit

Board)

Set the

push

the

AUTO

properly

input

terminated

connector

the

TRIG VIEW

switch

switchtoCH1.

signal

from

the

V

standardized

.5

connector

horizontal

POSITION

Gain R723

the

two

Trigger

SC

502

SECONDS/DIV

View

trigger

sine-wave

.

pushbutton

to

AMP

Disconnect

EXT

TRIG

amplitude

.

to

for

exactly10major

crt

spots

Centering

mode

pushbuttonin.

generatortothe

and

the

the

input

connectorand

signal

center

.

Disconnect

R433

SWITCH

and

set

triggering

fast-rise

from

two

dots

graticule

the pulse

(F&I

to

5Pand

Connect

the

pulse

the

on

CH

a
1

To

avoid

possible
not allow a
extended

periodoftime

SettheSC502

the

horizontal position

with

trace

the
SECONDS/DIV
such

that

the

crt

Adjust

vertical

19.Adjust

EXT

graticule

External

Compensation

Board)

triggering

mode

terminated

Set

theSC502

pushbutton

and

SOURCE

fast-rise

R723

generatortothe
TRIG

VIEW

pushbuttoninand

.

adjustment
to

position

Adjust

the

pulse generator

bright

damage
spot

to

to

remain

within

SECONDS/DIV

controltoalign

far

left

graticule

switchtoAMP.Set

line

will

.

phosphor

Bal

R535toposition

center

Horizontal

and

Gain

C516

Circuit

(Main

SECONDS/DIV

switch

to

its

EXT.Set

to

out

position.Connectaproperly

signalof1msperiod

EXT

TRIG

input

the

TRIGGERING

waveformatthe

for

a 5

div

display

the

crt

phosphor,

stationary

the

viewing

switchto5mand

the

startofthe

line.Change

INTENSITY

the

notbedamaged

crt

the

Attenuator

(Trigger

Board)

switchto.2

the

AUTO

from

connector.Push

hold

during the

LEVELasnecessary

centerofthe

.

for

area

.

rotate

.

to

spot

Circuit

m

and

trigger

the pulse
following

crt.Adjust

do

an

the

level

the

the

the

crt

Set

the

output

50

kHzand

adjust
divisionsofSC
LEVEL

midway

ton

waveform

horizontal
SLOPE
of
The

between
switch

position
ing

pushbutton
previous

trigger

to

between

and

hold

Adjust

Trig

switchtominus

the

display

final

adjustmentofR433

the

positions

Release

of

point

setting.Repeat

in

it

View

trace

graticule

(TRIG

display

TRIG

the

the

triggering

on

the

and

points.Disconnect

frequencyofthe

its

output

502

crt

display.Adjust

the

sine-wave

sine-wave

amplitudetoobtain6major

signalatits

peaks.DepresstheTRIG

during the

(TV)

on

the

center

and

VIEW

following

Center

SC

502
line.Change
recheck

pushbutton

R433

should

starts

for

both the+and

.

VIEW

pushbutton

LEVEL

to select

waveform.Depress

check

that

the

display

at

various

the

sine-wave

generator

generator

the

triggering

50%

point

VIEW

adjustment

so the

startofthe

crt

display

the

the

triggering

starting

still

depressed)

is at

beacompromise

-

and

change

another

the

TRIGVIEW

correspondstothe

triggering

.

to

; i.e.,

pushbut-

.

the

position

.

SLOPE

the

trigger-

LEVEL

Adjust

without

4-14

ATT

any

C516

C,

overshootorrolloff

foraflat

.

toponthe

waveform

SC

This

502

completes

.

the

adjustment

procedure

REVEAPR

for

the

1980